Project Configuration

Introduction

ESP-IDF uses kconfiglib which is a Python-based extension to the Kconfig system which provides a compile-time project configuration mechanism. Kconfig is based around options of several types: integer, string, boolean. Kconfig files specify dependencies between options, default values of the options, the way the options are grouped together, etc.

For the complete list of available features please see Kconfig and kconfiglib extentions.

Project Configuration Menu

Application developers can open a terminal-based project configuration menu with the idf.py menuconfig build target.

After being updated, this configuration is saved inside sdkconfig file in the project root directory. Based on sdkconfig, application build targets will generate sdkconfig.h file in the build directory, and will make sdkconfig options available to the project build system and source files.

Using sdkconfig.defaults

In some cases, such as when sdkconfig file is under revision control, the fact that sdkconfig file gets changed by the build system may be inconvenient. The build system offers a way to avoid this, in the form of sdkconfig.defaults file. This file is never touched by the build system, and can be created manually or automatically. It can contain all the options which matter for the given application and are different from the default ones. The format is the same as that of the sdkconfig file. sdkconfig.defaults can be created manually when one remembers all the changed configurations. Otherwise, the file can be generated automatically by running the idf.py save-defconfig command.

Once sdkconfig.defaults is created, sdkconfig can be deleted and added to the ignore list of the revision control system (e.g. .gitignore file for git). Project build targets will automatically create sdkconfig file, populated with the settings from sdkconfig.defaults file, and the rest of the settings will be set to their default values. Note that the build process will not override settings that are already in sdkconfig by ones from sdkconfig.defaults. For more information, see 自定义 sdkconfig 的默认值.

Kconfig Formatting Rules

The following attributes of Kconfig files are standardized:

  • Within any menu, option names should have a consistent prefix. The prefix length is currently set to at least 3 characters.

  • The indentation style is 4 characters created by spaces. All sub-items belonging to a parent item are indented by one level deeper. For example, menu is indented by 0 characters, the config inside of the menu by 4 characters, the help of the config by 8 characters and the text of the help by 12 characters.

  • No trailing spaces are allowed at the end of the lines.

  • The maximum length of options is set to 40 characters.

  • The maximum length of lines is set to 120 characters.

Format checker

tools/ci/check_kconfigs.py is provided for checking the Kconfig formatting rules. The checker checks all Kconfig and Kconfig.projbuild files in the ESP-IDF directory and generates a new file with suffix .new with some recommendations how to fix issues (if there are any). Please note that the checker cannot correct all rules and the responsibility of the developer is to check and make final corrections in order to pass the tests. For example, indentations will be corrected if there isn’t some misleading previous formatting but it cannot come up with a common prefix for options inside a menu.

Backward Compatibility of Kconfig Options

The standard Kconfig tools ignore unknown options in sdkconfig. So if a developer has custom settings for options which are renamed in newer ESP-IDF releases then the given setting for the option would be silently ignored. Therefore, several features have been adopted to avoid this:

  1. confgen.py is used by the tool chain to pre-process sdkconfig files before anything else, for example menuconfig, would read them. As the consequence, the settings for old options will be kept and not ignored.

  2. confgen.py recursively finds all sdkconfig.rename files in ESP-IDF directory which contain old and new Kconfig option names. Old options are replaced by new ones in the sdkconfig file. Renames that should only appear for a single target can be placed in a target specific rename file: sdkconfig.rename.TARGET, where TARGET is the target name, e.g. sdkconfig.rename.esp32s2.

  3. confgen.py post-processes sdkconfig files and generates all build outputs (sdkconfig.h, sdkconfig.cmake, auto.conf) by adding a list of compatibility statements, i.e. value of the old option is set the value of the new option (after modification). This is done in order to not break customer codes where old option might still be used.

  4. Deprecated options and their replacements are automatically generated by confgen.py.

Configuration Options Reference

Subsequent sections contain the list of available ESP-IDF options, automatically generated from Kconfig files. Note that depending on the options selected, some options listed here may not be visible by default in the interface of menuconfig.

By convention, all option names are upper case with underscores. When Kconfig generates sdkconfig and sdkconfig.h files, option names are prefixed with CONFIG_. So if an option ENABLE_FOO is defined in a Kconfig file and selected in menuconfig, then sdkconfig and sdkconfig.h files will have CONFIG_ENABLE_FOO defined. In this reference, option names are also prefixed with CONFIG_, same as in the source code.

Build type

Contains:

CONFIG_APP_BUILD_TYPE

Application build type

Found in: Build type

Select the way the application is built.

By default, the application is built as a binary file in a format compatible with the ESP-IDF bootloader. In addition to this application, 2nd stage bootloader is also built. Application and bootloader binaries can be written into flash and loaded/executed from there.

Another option, useful for only very small and limited applications, is to only link the .elf file of the application, such that it can be loaded directly into RAM over JTAG. Note that since IRAM and DRAM sizes are very limited, it is not possible to build any complex application this way. However for kinds of testing and debugging, this option may provide faster iterations, since the application does not need to be written into flash. Note that at the moment, ESP-IDF does not contain all the startup code required to initialize the CPUs and ROM memory (data/bss). Therefore it is necessary to execute a bit of ROM code prior to executing the application. A gdbinit file may look as follows (for ESP32):

# Connect to a running instance of OpenOCD target remote :3333 # Reset and halt the target mon reset halt # Run to a specific point in ROM code, # where most of initialization is complete. thb *0x40007d54 c # Load the application into RAM load # Run till app_main tb app_main c

Execute this gdbinit file as follows:

xtensa-esp32-elf-gdb build/app-name.elf -x gdbinit

Example gdbinit files for other targets can be found in tools/test_apps/system/gdb_loadable_elf/

Recommended sdkconfig.defaults for building loadable ELF files is as follows. CONFIG_APP_BUILD_TYPE_ELF_RAM is required, other options help reduce application memory footprint.

CONFIG_APP_BUILD_TYPE_ELF_RAM=y CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_TERMIOS= CONFIG_NEWLIB_NANO_FORMAT=y CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC_PRINT_HALT=y CONFIG_ESP_DEBUG_STUBS_ENABLE= CONFIG_ESP_ERR_TO_NAME_LOOKUP=

Available options:

  • Default (binary application + 2nd stage bootloader) (APP_BUILD_TYPE_APP_2NDBOOT)

  • ELF file, loadable into RAM (EXPERIMENTAL)) (APP_BUILD_TYPE_ELF_RAM)

CONFIG_APP_REPRODUCIBLE_BUILD

Enable reproducible build

Found in: Build type

If enabled, all date, time, and path information would be eliminated. A .gdbinit file would be create automatically. (or will be append if you have one already)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_APP_NO_BLOBS

No Binary Blobs

Found in: Build type

If enabled, this disables the linking of binary libraries in the application build. Note that after enabling this Wi-Fi/Bluetooth will not work.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_APP_COMPATIBLE_PRE_V2_1_BOOTLOADERS

App compatible with bootloaders before ESP-IDF v2.1

Found in: Build type

Bootloaders before ESP-IDF v2.1 did less initialisation of the system clock. This setting needs to be enabled to build an app which can be booted by these older bootloaders.

If this setting is enabled, the app can be booted by any bootloader from IDF v1.0 up to the current version.

If this setting is disabled, the app can only be booted by bootloaders from IDF v2.1 or newer.

Enabling this setting adds approximately 1KB to the app’s IRAM usage.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_APP_COMPATIBLE_PRE_V3_1_BOOTLOADERS

App compatible with bootloader and partition table before ESP-IDF v3.1

Found in: Build type

Partition tables before ESP-IDF V3.1 do not contain an MD5 checksum field, and the bootloader before ESP-IDF v3.1 cannot read a partition table that contains an MD5 checksum field.

Enable this option only if your app needs to boot on a bootloader and/or partition table that was generated from a version *before* ESP-IDF v3.1.

If this option and Flash Encryption are enabled at the same time, and any data partitions in the partition table are marked Encrypted, then the partition encrypted flag should be manually verified in the app before accessing the partition (see CVE-2021-27926).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Bootloader config

Contains:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION

Bootloader optimization Level

Found in: Bootloader config

This option sets compiler optimization level (gcc -O argument) for the bootloader.

  • The default “Size” setting will add the -0s flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “Debug” setting will add the -Og flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “Performance” setting will add the -O2 flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “None” setting will add the -O0 flag to CFLAGS.

Note that custom optimization levels may be unsupported.

Available options:

  • Size (-Os) (BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_SIZE)

  • Debug (-Og) (BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_DEBUG)

  • Optimize for performance (-O2) (BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_PERF)

  • Debug without optimization (-O0) (BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_NONE)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL

Bootloader log verbosity

Found in: Bootloader config

Specify how much output to see in bootloader logs.

Available options:

  • No output (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_NONE)

  • Error (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • Warning (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_WARN)

  • Info (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • Verbose (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

Serial Flash Configurations

Contains:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_SPI_CUSTOM_WP_PIN

Use custom SPI Flash WP Pin when flash pins set in eFuse (read help)

Found in: Bootloader config > Serial Flash Configurations

This setting is only used if the SPI flash pins have been overridden by setting the eFuses SPI_PAD_CONFIG_xxx, and the SPI flash mode is QIO or QOUT.

When this is the case, the eFuse config only defines 3 of the 4 Quad I/O data pins. The WP pin (aka ESP32 pin “SD_DATA_3” or SPI flash pin “IO2”) is not specified in eFuse. The same pin is also used for external SPIRAM if it is enabled.

If this config item is set to N (default), the correct WP pin will be automatically used for any Espressif chip or module with integrated flash. If a custom setting is needed, set this config item to Y and specify the GPIO number connected to the WP.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QIO || ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QOUT

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_SPI_WP_PIN

Custom SPI Flash WP Pin

Found in: Bootloader config > Serial Flash Configurations

The option “Use custom SPI Flash WP Pin” must be set or this value is ignored

If burning a customized set of SPI flash pins in eFuse and using QIO or QOUT mode for flash, set this value to the GPIO number of the SPI flash WP pin.

Range:

  • from 0 to 33 if ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QIO || ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QOUT

Default value:

  • 7 if ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QIO || ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QOUT

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FLASH_DC_AWARE

Allow app adjust Dummy Cycle bits in SPI Flash for higher frequency (READ HELP FIRST)

Found in: Bootloader config > Serial Flash Configurations

This will force 2nd bootloader to be loaded by DOUT mode, and will restore Dummy Cycle setting by resetting the Flash

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FLASH_XMC_SUPPORT

Enable the support for flash chips of XMC (READ DOCS FIRST)

Found in: Bootloader config > Serial Flash Configurations

Perform the startup flow recommended by XMC. Please consult XMC for the details of this flow. XMC chips will be forbidden to be used, when this option is disabled.

DON’T DISABLE THIS UNLESS YOU KNOW WHAT YOU ARE DOING.

comment “Features below require specific hardware (READ DOCS FIRST!)”

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_VDDSDIO_BOOST

VDDSDIO LDO voltage

Found in: Bootloader config

If this option is enabled, and VDDSDIO LDO is set to 1.8V (using eFuse or MTDI bootstrapping pin), bootloader will change LDO settings to output 1.9V instead. This helps prevent flash chip from browning out during flash programming operations.

This option has no effect if VDDSDIO is set to 3.3V, or if the internal VDDSDIO regulator is disabled via eFuse.

Available options:

  • 1.8V (BOOTLOADER_VDDSDIO_BOOST_1_8V)

  • 1.9V (BOOTLOADER_VDDSDIO_BOOST_1_9V)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET

GPIO triggers factory reset

Found in: Bootloader config

Allows to reset the device to factory settings: - clear one or more data partitions; - boot from “factory” partition. The factory reset will occur if there is a GPIO input held at the configured level while device starts up. See settings below.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_NUM_PIN_FACTORY_RESET

Number of the GPIO input for factory reset

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET

The selected GPIO will be configured as an input with internal pull-up enabled (note that on some SoCs. not all pins have an internal pull-up, consult the hardware datasheet for details.) To trigger a factory reset, this GPIO must be held high or low (as configured) on startup.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET_PIN_LEVEL

Factory reset GPIO level

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET

Pin level for factory reset, can be triggered on low or high.

Available options:

  • Reset on GPIO low (BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET_PIN_LOW)

  • Reset on GPIO high (BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET_PIN_HIGH)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_OTA_DATA_ERASE

Clear OTA data on factory reset (select factory partition)

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET

The device will boot from “factory” partition (or OTA slot 0 if no factory partition is present) after a factory reset.

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_DATA_FACTORY_RESET

Comma-separated names of partitions to clear on factory reset

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET

Allows customers to select which data partitions will be erased while factory reset.

Specify the names of partitions as a comma-delimited with optional spaces for readability. (Like this: “nvs, phy_init, …”) Make sure that the name specified in the partition table and here are the same. Partitions of type “app” cannot be specified here.

Default value:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_TEST

GPIO triggers boot from test app partition

Found in: Bootloader config

Allows to run the test app from “TEST” partition. A boot from “test” partition will occur if there is a GPIO input pulled low while device starts up. See settings below.

Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_NUM_PIN_APP_TEST

Number of the GPIO input to boot TEST partition

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_TEST

The selected GPIO will be configured as an input with internal pull-up enabled. To trigger a test app, this GPIO must be pulled low on reset. After the GPIO input is deactivated and the device reboots, the old application will boot. (factory or OTA[x]). Note that GPIO34-39 do not have an internal pullup and an external one must be provided.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_TEST_PIN_LEVEL

App test GPIO level

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_TEST

Pin level for app test, can be triggered on low or high.

Available options:

  • Enter test app on GPIO low (BOOTLOADER_APP_TEST_PIN_LOW)

  • Enter test app on GPIO high (BOOTLOADER_APP_TEST_PIN_HIGH)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_HOLD_TIME_GPIO

Hold time of GPIO for reset/test mode (seconds)

Found in: Bootloader config

The GPIO must be held low continuously for this period of time after reset before a factory reset or test partition boot (as applicable) is performed.

Default value:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_REGION_PROTECTION_ENABLE

Enable protection for unmapped memory regions

Found in: Bootloader config

Protects the unmapped memory regions of the entire address space from unintended accesses. This will ensure that an exception will be triggered whenever the CPU performs a memory operation on unmapped regions of the address space.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_WDT_ENABLE

Use RTC watchdog in start code

Found in: Bootloader config

Tracks the execution time of startup code. If the execution time is exceeded, the RTC_WDT will restart system. It is also useful to prevent a lock up in start code caused by an unstable power source. NOTE: Tracks the execution time starts from the bootloader code - re-set timeout, while selecting the source for slow_clk - and ends calling app_main. Re-set timeout is needed due to WDT uses a SLOW_CLK clock source. After changing a frequency slow_clk a time of WDT needs to re-set for new frequency. slow_clk depends on RTC_CLK_SRC (INTERNAL_RC or EXTERNAL_CRYSTAL).

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_WDT_DISABLE_IN_USER_CODE

Allows RTC watchdog disable in user code

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_WDT_ENABLE

If this option is set, the ESP-IDF app must explicitly reset, feed, or disable the rtc_wdt in the app’s own code. If this option is not set (default), then rtc_wdt will be disabled by ESP-IDF before calling the app_main() function.

Use function rtc_wdt_feed() for resetting counter of rtc_wdt. Use function rtc_wdt_disable() for disabling rtc_wdt.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_WDT_TIME_MS

Timeout for RTC watchdog (ms)

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_WDT_ENABLE

Verify that this parameter is correct and more then the execution time. Pay attention to options such as reset to factory, trigger test partition and encryption on boot - these options can increase the execution time. Note: RTC_WDT will reset while encryption operations will be performed.

Range:

  • from 0 to 120000

Default value:

  • 9000

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ROLLBACK_ENABLE

Enable app rollback support

Found in: Bootloader config

After updating the app, the bootloader runs a new app with the “ESP_OTA_IMG_PENDING_VERIFY” state set. This state prevents the re-run of this app. After the first boot of the new app in the user code, the function should be called to confirm the operability of the app or vice versa about its non-operability. If the app is working, then it is marked as valid. Otherwise, it is marked as not valid and rolls back to the previous working app. A reboot is performed, and the app is booted before the software update. Note: If during the first boot a new app the power goes out or the WDT works, then roll back will happen. Rollback is possible only between the apps with the same security versions.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ANTI_ROLLBACK

Enable app anti-rollback support

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ROLLBACK_ENABLE

This option prevents rollback to previous firmware/application image with lower security version.

Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_SECURE_VERSION

eFuse secure version of app

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ROLLBACK_ENABLE > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ANTI_ROLLBACK

The secure version is the sequence number stored in the header of each firmware. The security version is set in the bootloader, version is recorded in the eFuse field as the number of set ones. The allocated number of bits in the efuse field for storing the security version is limited (see BOOTLOADER_APP_SEC_VER_SIZE_EFUSE_FIELD option).

Bootloader: When bootloader selects an app to boot, an app is selected that has a security version greater or equal that recorded in eFuse field. The app is booted with a higher (or equal) secure version.

The security version is worth increasing if in previous versions there is a significant vulnerability and their use is not acceptable.

Your partition table should has a scheme with ota_0 + ota_1 (without factory).

Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_SEC_VER_SIZE_EFUSE_FIELD

Size of the efuse secure version field

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ROLLBACK_ENABLE > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ANTI_ROLLBACK

The size of the efuse secure version field. Its length is limited to 32 bits for ESP32 and 16 bits for ESP32-S2. This determines how many times the security version can be increased.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_EFUSE_SECURE_VERSION_EMULATE

Emulate operations with efuse secure version(only test)

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ROLLBACK_ENABLE > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ANTI_ROLLBACK

This option allows to emulate read/write operations with all eFuses and efuse secure version. It allows to test anti-rollback implemention without permanent write eFuse bits. There should be an entry in partition table with following details: emul_efuse, data, efuse, , 0x2000.

This option enables: EFUSE_VIRTUAL and EFUSE_VIRTUAL_KEEP_IN_FLASH.

Default value:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_SKIP_VALIDATE_IN_DEEP_SLEEP

Skip image validation when exiting deep sleep

Found in: Bootloader config

This option disables the normal validation of an image coming out of deep sleep (checksums, SHA256, and signature). This is a trade-off between wakeup performance from deep sleep, and image integrity checks.

Only enable this if you know what you are doing. It should not be used in conjunction with using deep_sleep() entry and changing the active OTA partition as this would skip the validation upon first load of the new OTA partition.

It is possible to enable this option with Secure Boot if “allow insecure options” is enabled, however it’s strongly recommended to NOT enable it as it may allow a Secure Boot bypass.

Default value:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_SKIP_VALIDATE_ON_POWER_ON

Skip image validation from power on reset (READ HELP FIRST)

Found in: Bootloader config

Some applications need to boot very quickly from power on. By default, the entire app binary is read from flash and verified which takes up a significant portion of the boot time.

Enabling this option will skip validation of the app when the SoC boots from power on. Note that in this case it’s not possible for the bootloader to detect if an app image is corrupted in the flash, therefore it’s not possible to safely fall back to a different app partition. Flash corruption of this kind is unlikely but can happen if there is a serious firmware bug or physical damage.

Following other reset types, the bootloader will still validate the app image. This increases the chances that flash corruption resulting in a crash can be detected following soft reset, and the bootloader will fall back to a valid app image. To increase the chances of successfully recovering from a flash corruption event, keep the option BOOTLOADER_WDT_ENABLE enabled and consider also enabling BOOTLOADER_WDT_DISABLE_IN_USER_CODE - then manually disable the RTC Watchdog once the app is running. In addition, enable both the Task and Interrupt watchdog timers with reset options set.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_SKIP_VALIDATE_ALWAYS

Skip image validation always (READ HELP FIRST)

Found in: Bootloader config

Selecting this option prevents the bootloader from ever validating the app image before booting it. Any flash corruption of the selected app partition will make the entire SoC unbootable.

Although flash corruption is a very rare case, it is not recommended to select this option. Consider selecting “Skip image validation from power on reset” instead. However, if boot time is the only important factor then it can be enabled.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_CUSTOM_RESERVE_RTC

Reserve RTC FAST memory for custom purposes

Found in: Bootloader config

This option allows the customer to place data in the RTC FAST memory, this area remains valid when rebooted, except for power loss. This memory is located at a fixed address and is available for both the bootloader and the application. (The application and bootoloader must be compiled with the same option). The RTC FAST memory has access only through PRO_CPU.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_CUSTOM_RESERVE_RTC_IN_CRC

Include custom memory in the CRC calculation

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_CUSTOM_RESERVE_RTC

This option allows the customer to use the legacy bootloader behavior when the RTC FAST memory CRC calculation takes place. When this option is enabled, the allocated user custom data will be taken into account in the CRC calculcation. This means that any change to the custom data would need a CRC update to prevent the bootloader from marking this data as corrupted. If this option is disabled, the custom data will not be taken into account when calculating the RTC FAST memory CRC. The user custom data can be changed freely, without the need to update the CRC. THIS OPTION MUST BE THE SAME FOR BOTH THE BOOTLOADER AND THE APPLICATION BUILDS.

Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_CUSTOM_RESERVE_RTC_SIZE

Size in bytes for custom purposes

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_CUSTOM_RESERVE_RTC

This option reserves in RTC FAST memory the area for custom purposes. If you want to create your own bootloader and save more information in this area of memory, you can increase it. It must be a multiple of 4 bytes. This area (rtc_retain_mem_t) is reserved and has access from the bootloader and an application.

Default value:

Security features

Contains:

CONFIG_SECURE_SIGNED_APPS_NO_SECURE_BOOT

Require signed app images

Found in: Security features

Require apps to be signed to verify their integrity.

This option uses the same app signature scheme as hardware secure boot, but unlike hardware secure boot it does not prevent the bootloader from being physically updated. This means that the device can be secured against remote network access, but not physical access. Compared to using hardware Secure Boot this option is much simpler to implement.

CONFIG_SECURE_SIGNED_APPS_SCHEME

App Signing Scheme

Found in: Security features

Select the Secure App signing scheme. Depends on the Chip Revision. There are two secure boot versions:

  1. Secure boot V1

    • Legacy custom secure boot scheme. Supported in ESP32 SoC.

  2. Secure boot V2

    • RSA based secure boot scheme. Supported in ESP32-ECO3 (ESP32 Chip Revision 3 onwards), ESP32-S2, ESP32-C3, ESP32-S3 SoCs.

    • ECDSA based secure boot scheme. Supported in ESP32-C2 SoC.

Available options:

  • ECDSA (SECURE_SIGNED_APPS_ECDSA_SCHEME)

    Embeds the ECDSA public key in the bootloader and signs the application with an ECDSA key. Refer to the documentation before enabling.

  • RSA (SECURE_SIGNED_APPS_RSA_SCHEME)

    Appends the RSA-3072 based Signature block to the application. Refer to <Secure Boot Version 2 documentation link> before enabling.

  • ECDSA (V2) (SECURE_SIGNED_APPS_ECDSA_V2_SCHEME)

    For Secure boot V2 (e.g., ESP32-C2 SoC), appends ECDSA based signature block to the application. Refer to documentation before enabling.

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_ECDSA_KEY_LEN_SIZE

ECDSA key size

Found in: Security features

Select the ECDSA key size. Two key sizes are supported

  • 192 bit key using NISTP192 curve

  • 256 bit key using NISTP256 curve (Recommended)

The advantage of using 256 bit key is the extra randomness which makes it difficult to be bruteforced compared to 192 bit key. At present, both key sizes are practically implausible to bruteforce.

Available options:

  • Using ECC curve NISTP192 (SECURE_BOOT_ECDSA_KEY_LEN_192_BITS)

  • Using ECC curve NISTP256 (Recommended) (SECURE_BOOT_ECDSA_KEY_LEN_256_BITS)

CONFIG_SECURE_SIGNED_ON_BOOT_NO_SECURE_BOOT

Bootloader verifies app signatures

Found in: Security features

If this option is set, the bootloader will be compiled with code to verify that an app is signed before booting it.

If hardware secure boot is enabled, this option is always enabled and cannot be disabled. If hardware secure boot is not enabled, this option doesn’t add significant security by itself so most users will want to leave it disabled.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_SIGNED_ON_UPDATE_NO_SECURE_BOOT

Verify app signature on update

Found in: Security features

If this option is set, any OTA updated apps will have the signature verified before being considered valid.

When enabled, the signature is automatically checked whenever the esp_ota_ops.h APIs are used for OTA updates, or esp_image_format.h APIs are used to verify apps.

If hardware secure boot is enabled, this option is always enabled and cannot be disabled. If hardware secure boot is not enabled, this option still adds significant security against network-based attackers by preventing spoofing of OTA updates.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT

Enable hardware Secure Boot in bootloader (READ DOCS FIRST)

Found in: Security features

Build a bootloader which enables Secure Boot on first boot.

Once enabled, Secure Boot will not boot a modified bootloader. The bootloader will only load a partition table or boot an app if the data has a verified digital signature. There are implications for reflashing updated apps once secure boot is enabled.

When enabling secure boot, JTAG and ROM BASIC Interpreter are permanently disabled by default.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_VERSION

Select secure boot version

Found in: Security features > CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT

Select the Secure Boot Version. Depends on the Chip Revision. Secure Boot V2 is the new RSA / ECDSA based secure boot scheme.

  • RSA based scheme is supported in ESP32 (Revision 3 onwards), ESP32-S2, ESP32-C3 (ECO3), ESP32-S3.

  • ECDSA based scheme is supported in ESP32-C2 SoC.

Please note that, RSA or ECDSA secure boot is property of specific SoC based on its HW design, supported crypto accelerators, die-size, cost and similar parameters. Please note that RSA scheme has requirement for bigger key sizes but at the same time it is comparatively faster than ECDSA verification.

Secure Boot V1 is the AES based (custom) secure boot scheme supported in ESP32 SoC.

Available options:

  • Enable Secure Boot version 1 (SECURE_BOOT_V1_ENABLED)

    Build a bootloader which enables secure boot version 1 on first boot. Refer to the Secure Boot section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version before enabling.

  • Enable Secure Boot version 2 (SECURE_BOOT_V2_ENABLED)

    Build a bootloader which enables Secure Boot version 2 on first boot. Refer to Secure Boot V2 section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version before enabling.

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOTLOADER_MODE

Secure bootloader mode

Found in: Security features

Available options:

  • One-time flash (SECURE_BOOTLOADER_ONE_TIME_FLASH)

    On first boot, the bootloader will generate a key which is not readable externally or by software. A digest is generated from the bootloader image itself. This digest will be verified on each subsequent boot.

    Enabling this option means that the bootloader cannot be changed after the first time it is booted.

  • Reflashable (SECURE_BOOTLOADER_REFLASHABLE)

    Generate a reusable secure bootloader key, derived (via SHA-256) from the secure boot signing key.

    This allows the secure bootloader to be re-flashed by anyone with access to the secure boot signing key.

    This option is less secure than one-time flash, because a leak of the digest key from one device allows reflashing of any device that uses it.

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_BUILD_SIGNED_BINARIES

Sign binaries during build

Found in: Security features

Once secure boot or signed app requirement is enabled, app images are required to be signed.

If enabled (default), these binary files are signed as part of the build process. The file named in “Secure boot private signing key” will be used to sign the image.

If disabled, unsigned app/partition data will be built. They must be signed manually using espsecure.py. Version 1 to enable ECDSA Based Secure Boot and Version 2 to enable RSA based Secure Boot. (for example, on a remote signing server.)

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_SIGNING_KEY

Secure boot private signing key

Found in: Security features > CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_BUILD_SIGNED_BINARIES

Path to the key file used to sign app images.

Key file is an ECDSA private key (NIST256p curve) in PEM format for Secure Boot V1. Key file is an RSA private key in PEM format for Secure Boot V2.

Path is evaluated relative to the project directory.

You can generate a new signing key by running the following command: espsecure.py generate_signing_key secure_boot_signing_key.pem

See the Secure Boot section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version for details.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_VERIFICATION_KEY

Secure boot public signature verification key

Found in: Security features

Path to a public key file used to verify signed images. Secure Boot V1: This ECDSA public key is compiled into the bootloader and/or app, to verify app images.

Key file is in raw binary format, and can be extracted from a PEM formatted private key using the espsecure.py extract_public_key command.

Refer to the Secure Boot section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version before enabling.

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_ENABLE_AGGRESSIVE_KEY_REVOKE

Enable Aggressive key revoke strategy

Found in: Security features

If this option is set, ROM bootloader will revoke the public key digest burned in efuse block if it fails to verify the signature of software bootloader with it. Revocation of keys does not happen when enabling secure boot. Once secure boot is enabled, key revocation checks will be done on subsequent boot-up, while verifying the software bootloader

This feature provides a strong resistance against physical attacks on the device.

NOTE: Once a digest slot is revoked, it can never be used again to verify an image This can lead to permanent bricking of the device, in case all keys are revoked because of signature verification failure.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOTLOADER_KEY_ENCODING

Hardware Key Encoding

Found in: Security features

In reflashable secure bootloader mode, a hardware key is derived from the signing key (with SHA-256) and can be written to eFuse with espefuse.py.

Normally this is a 256-bit key, but if 3/4 Coding Scheme is used on the device then the eFuse key is truncated to 192 bits.

This configuration item doesn’t change any firmware code, it only changes the size of key binary which is generated at build time.

Available options:

  • No encoding (256 bit key) (SECURE_BOOTLOADER_KEY_ENCODING_256BIT)

  • 3/4 encoding (192 bit key) (SECURE_BOOTLOADER_KEY_ENCODING_192BIT)

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_INSECURE

Allow potentially insecure options

Found in: Security features

You can disable some of the default protections offered by secure boot, in order to enable testing or a custom combination of security features.

Only enable these options if you are very sure.

Refer to the Secure Boot section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version before enabling.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_ENC_ENABLED

Enable flash encryption on boot (READ DOCS FIRST)

Found in: Security features

If this option is set, flash contents will be encrypted by the bootloader on first boot.

Note: After first boot, the system will be permanently encrypted. Re-flashing an encrypted system is complicated and not always possible.

Read Flash 加密 before enabling.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_KEYSIZE

Size of generated AES-XTS key

Found in: Security features > CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_ENC_ENABLED

Size of generated AES-XTS key.

  • AES-128 uses a 256-bit key (32 bytes) derived from 128 bits (16 bytes) burned in half Efuse key block. Internally, it calculates SHA256(128 bits)

  • AES-128 uses a 256-bit key (32 bytes) which occupies one Efuse key block.

  • AES-256 uses a 512-bit key (64 bytes) which occupies two Efuse key blocks.

This setting is ignored if either type of key is already burned to Efuse before the first boot. In this case, the pre-burned key is used and no new key is generated.

Available options:

  • AES-128 key derived from 128 bits (SHA256(128 bits)) (SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_AES128_DERIVED)

  • AES-128 (256-bit key) (SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_AES128)

  • AES-256 (512-bit key) (SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_AES256)

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE

Enable usage mode

Found in: Security features > CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_ENC_ENABLED

By default Development mode is enabled which allows ROM download mode to perform flash encryption operations (plaintext is sent to the device, and it encrypts it internally and writes ciphertext to flash.) This mode is not secure, it’s possible for an attacker to write their own chosen plaintext to flash.

Release mode should always be selected for production or manufacturing. Once enabled it’s no longer possible for the device in ROM Download Mode to use the flash encryption hardware.

Refer to the Flash Encryption section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for details.

Available options:

  • Development (NOT SECURE) (SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_DEVELOPMENT)

  • Release (SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_RELEASE)

Potentially insecure options

Contains:

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_ALLOW_ROM_BASIC

Leave ROM BASIC Interpreter available on reset

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

By default, the BASIC ROM Console starts on reset if no valid bootloader is read from the flash.

When either flash encryption or secure boot are enabled, the default is to disable this BASIC fallback mode permanently via eFuse.

If this option is set, this eFuse is not burned and the BASIC ROM Console may remain accessible. Only set this option in testing environments.

Default value:
CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_ALLOW_JTAG

Allow JTAG Debugging

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), the bootloader will permanently disable JTAG (across entire chip) on first boot when either secure boot or flash encryption is enabled.

Setting this option leaves JTAG on for debugging, which negates all protections of flash encryption and some of the protections of secure boot.

Only set this option in testing environments.

Default value:
CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_ALLOW_SHORT_APP_PARTITION

Allow app partition length not 64KB aligned

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), app partition size must be a multiple of 64KB. App images are padded to 64KB length, and the bootloader checks any trailing bytes after the signature (before the next 64KB boundary) have not been written. This is because flash cache maps entire 64KB pages into the address space. This prevents an attacker from appending unverified data after the app image in the flash, causing it to be mapped into the address space.

Setting this option allows the app partition length to be unaligned, and disables padding of the app image to this length. It is generally not recommended to set this option, unless you have a legacy partitioning scheme which doesn’t support 64KB aligned partition lengths.

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_V2_ALLOW_EFUSE_RD_DIS

Allow additional read protecting of efuses

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default, recommended), on first boot the bootloader will burn the WR_DIS_RD_DIS efuse when Secure Boot is enabled. This prevents any more efuses from being read protected.

If this option is set, it will remain possible to write the EFUSE_RD_DIS efuse field after Secure Boot is enabled. This may allow an attacker to read-protect the BLK2 efuse (for ESP32) and BLOCK4-BLOCK10 (i.e. BLOCK_KEY0-BLOCK_KEY5)(for other chips) holding the public key digest, causing an immediate denial of service and possibly allowing an additional fault injection attack to bypass the signature protection.

NOTE: Once a BLOCK is read-protected, the application will read all zeros from that block

NOTE: If “UART ROM download mode (Permanently disabled (recommended))” or “UART ROM download mode (Permanently switch to Secure mode (recommended))” is set, then it is __NOT__ possible to read/write efuses using espefuse.py utility. However, efuse can be read/written from the application

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_ALLOW_UNUSED_DIGEST_SLOTS

Leave unused digest slots available (not revoke)

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), during startup in the app all unused digest slots will be revoked. To revoke unused slot will be called esp_efuse_set_digest_revoke(num_digest) for each digest. Revoking unused digest slots makes ensures that no trusted keys can be added later by an attacker. If set, it means that you have a plan to use unused digests slots later.

Default value:
CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_UART_BOOTLOADER_ALLOW_ENC

Leave UART bootloader encryption enabled

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), the bootloader will permanently disable UART bootloader encryption access on first boot. If set, the UART bootloader will still be able to access hardware encryption.

It is recommended to only set this option in testing environments.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_DEVELOPMENT

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_UART_BOOTLOADER_ALLOW_DEC

Leave UART bootloader decryption enabled

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), the bootloader will permanently disable UART bootloader decryption access on first boot. If set, the UART bootloader will still be able to access hardware decryption.

Only set this option in testing environments. Setting this option allows complete bypass of flash encryption.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_DEVELOPMENT

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_UART_BOOTLOADER_ALLOW_CACHE

Leave UART bootloader flash cache enabled

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), the bootloader will permanently disable UART bootloader flash cache access on first boot. If set, the UART bootloader will still be able to access the flash cache.

Only set this option in testing environments.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_DEVELOPMENT

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_REQUIRE_ALREADY_ENABLED

Require flash encryption to be already enabled

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), and flash encryption is not yet enabled in eFuses, the 2nd stage bootloader will enable flash encryption: generate the flash encryption key and program eFuses. If this option is set, and flash encryption is not yet enabled, the bootloader will error out and reboot. If flash encryption is enabled in eFuses, this option does not change the bootloader behavior.

Only use this option in testing environments, to avoid accidentally enabling flash encryption on the wrong device. The device needs to have flash encryption already enabled using espefuse.py.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_DEVELOPMENT

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPT_ONLY_IMAGE_LEN_IN_APP_PART

Encrypt only the app image that is present in the partition of type app

Found in: Security features

If set, optimise encryption time for the partition of type APP, by only encrypting the app image that is present in the partition, instead of the whole partition. The image length used for encryption is derived from the image metadata, which includes the size of the app image, checksum, hash and also the signature sector when secure boot is enabled.

If not set (default), the whole partition of type APP would be encrypted, which increases the encryption time but might be useful if there is any custom data appended to the firmware image.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_CHECK_ENC_EN_IN_APP

Check Flash Encryption enabled on app startup

Found in: Security features

If set (default), in an app during startup code, there is a check of the flash encryption eFuse bit is on (as the bootloader should already have set it). The app requires this bit is on to continue work otherwise abort.

If not set, the app does not care if the flash encryption eFuse bit is set or not.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_UART_ROM_DL_MODE

UART ROM download mode

Found in: Security features

Available options:

  • UART ROM download mode (Permanently disabled (recommended)) (SECURE_DISABLE_ROM_DL_MODE)

    If set, during startup the app will burn an eFuse bit to permanently disable the UART ROM Download Mode. This prevents any future use of esptool.py, espefuse.py and similar tools.

    Once disabled, if the SoC is booted with strapping pins set for ROM Download Mode then an error is printed instead.

    It is recommended to enable this option in any production application where Flash Encryption and/or Secure Boot is enabled and access to Download Mode is not required.

    It is also possible to permanently disable Download Mode by calling esp_efuse_disable_rom_download_mode() at runtime.

  • UART ROM download mode (Permanently switch to Secure mode (recommended)) (SECURE_ENABLE_SECURE_ROM_DL_MODE)

    If set, during startup the app will burn an eFuse bit to permanently switch the UART ROM Download Mode into a separate Secure Download mode. This option can only work if Download Mode is not already disabled by eFuse.

    Secure Download mode limits the use of Download Mode functions to update SPI config, changing baud rate, basic flash write and a command to return a summary of currently enabled security features (get_security_info).

    Secure Download mode is not compatible with the esptool.py flasher stub feature, espefuse.py, read/writing memory or registers, encrypted download, or any other features that interact with unsupported Download Mode commands.

    Secure Download mode should be enabled in any application where Flash Encryption and/or Secure Boot is enabled. Disabling this option does not immediately cancel the benefits of the security features, but it increases the potential “attack surface” for an attacker to try and bypass them with a successful physical attack.

    It is also possible to enable secure download mode at runtime by calling esp_efuse_enable_rom_secure_download_mode()

    Note: Secure Download mode is not available for ESP32 (includes revisions till ECO3).

  • UART ROM download mode (Enabled (not recommended)) (SECURE_INSECURE_ALLOW_DL_MODE)

    This is a potentially insecure option. Enabling this option will allow the full UART download mode to stay enabled. This option SHOULD NOT BE ENABLED for production use cases.

Application manager

Contains:

CONFIG_APP_COMPILE_TIME_DATE

Use time/date stamp for app

Found in: Application manager

If set, then the app will be built with the current time/date stamp. It is stored in the app description structure. If not set, time/date stamp will be excluded from app image. This can be useful for getting the same binary image files made from the same source, but at different times.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_APP_EXCLUDE_PROJECT_VER_VAR

Exclude PROJECT_VER from firmware image

Found in: Application manager

The PROJECT_VER variable from the build system will not affect the firmware image. This value will not be contained in the esp_app_desc structure.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_APP_EXCLUDE_PROJECT_NAME_VAR

Exclude PROJECT_NAME from firmware image

Found in: Application manager

The PROJECT_NAME variable from the build system will not affect the firmware image. This value will not be contained in the esp_app_desc structure.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_APP_PROJECT_VER_FROM_CONFIG

Get the project version from Kconfig

Found in: Application manager

If this is enabled, then config item APP_PROJECT_VER will be used for the variable PROJECT_VER. Other ways to set PROJECT_VER will be ignored.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_APP_PROJECT_VER

Project version

Found in: Application manager > CONFIG_APP_PROJECT_VER_FROM_CONFIG

Project version

Default value:

CONFIG_APP_RETRIEVE_LEN_ELF_SHA

The length of APP ELF SHA is stored in RAM(chars)

Found in: Application manager

At startup, the app will read this many hex characters from the embedded APP ELF SHA-256 hash value and store it in static RAM. This ensures the app ELF SHA-256 value is always available if it needs to be printed by the panic handler code. Changing this value will change the size of a static buffer, in bytes.

Range:

  • from 8 to 64

Default value:

  • 16

Serial flasher config

Contains:

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_NO_STUB

Disable download stub

Found in: Serial flasher config

The flasher tool sends a precompiled download stub first by default. That stub allows things like compressed downloads and more. Usually you should not need to disable that feature

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE

Flash SPI mode

Found in: Serial flasher config

Mode the flash chip is flashed in, as well as the default mode for the binary to run in.

Available options:

  • QIO (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QIO)

  • QOUT (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QOUT)

  • DIO (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_DIO)

  • DOUT (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_DOUT)

  • OPI (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_OPI)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_FLASH_SAMPLE_MODE

Flash Sampling Mode

Found in: Serial flasher config

Available options:

  • STR Mode (ESPTOOLPY_FLASH_SAMPLE_MODE_STR)

  • DTR Mode (ESPTOOLPY_FLASH_SAMPLE_MODE_DTR)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ

Flash SPI speed

Found in: Serial flasher config

Available options:

  • 120 MHz (READ DOCS FIRST) (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_120M)

    • Optional feature for QSPI Flash. Read docs and enable CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_HPM_ENA first!

  • 80 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_80M)

  • 60 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_60M)

  • 48 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_48M)

  • 40 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_40M)

  • 30 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_30M)

  • 26 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_26M)

  • 24 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_24M)

  • 20 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_20M)

  • 15 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_15M)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE

Flash size

Found in: Serial flasher config

SPI flash size, in megabytes

Available options:

  • 1 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_1MB)

  • 2 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_2MB)

  • 4 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_4MB)

  • 8 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_8MB)

  • 16 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_16MB)

  • 32 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_32MB)

  • 64 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_64MB)

  • 128 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_128MB)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_HEADER_FLASHSIZE_UPDATE

Detect flash size when flashing bootloader

Found in: Serial flasher config

If this option is set, flashing the project will automatically detect the flash size of the target chip and update the bootloader image before it is flashed.

Enabling this option turns off the image protection against corruption by a SHA256 digest. Updating the bootloader image before flashing would invalidate the digest.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_BEFORE

Before flashing

Found in: Serial flasher config

Configure whether esptool.py should reset the ESP32 before flashing.

Automatic resetting depends on the RTS & DTR signals being wired from the serial port to the ESP32. Most USB development boards do this internally.

Available options:

  • Reset to bootloader (ESPTOOLPY_BEFORE_RESET)

  • No reset (ESPTOOLPY_BEFORE_NORESET)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_AFTER

After flashing

Found in: Serial flasher config

Configure whether esptool.py should reset the ESP32 after flashing.

Automatic resetting depends on the RTS & DTR signals being wired from the serial port to the ESP32. Most USB development boards do this internally.

Available options:

  • Reset after flashing (ESPTOOLPY_AFTER_RESET)

  • Stay in bootloader (ESPTOOLPY_AFTER_NORESET)

Partition Table

Contains:

CONFIG_PARTITION_TABLE_TYPE

Partition Table

Found in: Partition Table

The partition table to flash to the ESP32. The partition table determines where apps, data and other resources are expected to be found.

The predefined partition table CSV descriptions can be found in the components/partition_table directory. These are mostly intended for example and development use, it’s expect that for production use you will copy one of these CSV files and create a custom partition CSV for your application.

Available options:

  • Single factory app, no OTA (PARTITION_TABLE_SINGLE_APP)

    This is the default partition table, designed to fit into a 2MB or larger flash with a single 1MB app partition.

    The corresponding CSV file in the IDF directory is components/partition_table/partitions_singleapp.csv

    This partition table is not suitable for an app that needs OTA (over the air update) capability.

  • Single factory app (large), no OTA (PARTITION_TABLE_SINGLE_APP_LARGE)

    This is a variation of the default partition table, that expands the 1MB app partition size to 1.5MB to fit more code.

    The corresponding CSV file in the IDF directory is components/partition_table/partitions_singleapp_large.csv

    This partition table is not suitable for an app that needs OTA (over the air update) capability.

  • Factory app, two OTA definitions (PARTITION_TABLE_TWO_OTA)

    This is a basic OTA-enabled partition table with a factory app partition plus two OTA app partitions. All are 1MB, so this partition table requires 4MB or larger flash size.

    The corresponding CSV file in the IDF directory is components/partition_table/partitions_two_ota.csv

  • Custom partition table CSV (PARTITION_TABLE_CUSTOM)

    Specify the path to the partition table CSV to use for your project.

    Consult the Partition Table section in the ESP-IDF Programmers Guide for more information.

  • Single factory app, no OTA, encrypted NVS (PARTITION_TABLE_SINGLE_APP_ENCRYPTED_NVS)

    This is a variation of the default “Single factory app, no OTA” partition table that supports encrypted NVS when using flash encryption. See the Flash Encryption section in the ESP-IDF Programmers Guide for more information.

    The corresponding CSV file in the IDF directory is components/partition_table/partitions_singleapp_encr_nvs.csv

  • Single factory app (large), no OTA, encrypted NVS (PARTITION_TABLE_SINGLE_APP_LARGE_ENC_NVS)

    This is a variation of the “Single factory app (large), no OTA” partition table that supports encrypted NVS when using flash encryption. See the Flash Encryption section in the ESP-IDF Programmers Guide for more information.

    The corresponding CSV file in the IDF directory is components/partition_table/partitions_singleapp_large_encr_nvs.csv

  • Factory app, two OTA definitions, encrypted NVS (PARTITION_TABLE_TWO_OTA_ENCRYPTED_NVS)

    This is a variation of the “Factory app, two OTA definitions” partition table that supports encrypted NVS when using flash encryption. See the Flash Encryption section in the ESP-IDF Programmers Guide for more information.

    The corresponding CSV file in the IDF directory is components/partition_table/partitions_two_ota_encr_nvs.csv

CONFIG_PARTITION_TABLE_CUSTOM_FILENAME

Custom partition CSV file

Found in: Partition Table

Name of the custom partition CSV filename. This path is evaluated relative to the project root directory.

Default value:

  • “partitions.csv”

CONFIG_PARTITION_TABLE_OFFSET

Offset of partition table

Found in: Partition Table

The address of partition table (by default 0x8000). Allows you to move the partition table, it gives more space for the bootloader. Note that the bootloader and app will both need to be compiled with the same PARTITION_TABLE_OFFSET value.

This number should be a multiple of 0x1000.

Note that partition offsets in the partition table CSV file may need to be changed if this value is set to a higher value. To have each partition offset adapt to the configured partition table offset, leave all partition offsets blank in the CSV file.

Default value:

  • “0x8000”

CONFIG_PARTITION_TABLE_MD5

Generate an MD5 checksum for the partition table

Found in: Partition Table

Generate an MD5 checksum for the partition table for protecting the integrity of the table. The generation should be turned off for legacy bootloaders which cannot recognize the MD5 checksum in the partition table.

Default value:

Compiler options

Contains:

CONFIG_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION

Optimization Level

Found in: Compiler options

This option sets compiler optimization level (gcc -O argument) for the app.

  • The “Default” setting will add the -0g flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “Size” setting will add the -0s flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “Performance” setting will add the -O2 flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “None” setting will add the -O0 flag to CFLAGS.

The “Size” setting cause the compiled code to be smaller and faster, but may lead to difficulties of correlating code addresses to source file lines when debugging.

The “Performance” setting causes the compiled code to be larger and faster, but will be easier to correlated code addresses to source file lines.

“None” with -O0 produces compiled code without optimization.

Note that custom optimization levels may be unsupported.

Compiler optimization for the IDF bootloader is set separately, see the BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION setting.

Available options:

  • Debug (-Og) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_DEFAULT)

  • Optimize for size (-Os) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_SIZE)

  • Optimize for performance (-O2) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_PERF)

  • Debug without optimization (-O0) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_NONE)

CONFIG_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_ASSERTION_LEVEL

Assertion level

Found in: Compiler options

Assertions can be:

  • Enabled. Failure will print verbose assertion details. This is the default.

  • Set to “silent” to save code size (failed assertions will abort() but user needs to use the aborting address to find the line number with the failed assertion.)

  • Disabled entirely (not recommended for most configurations.) -DNDEBUG is added to CPPFLAGS in this case.

Available options:

  • Enabled (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_ASSERTIONS_ENABLE)

    Enable assertions. Assertion content and line number will be printed on failure.

  • Silent (saves code size) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_ASSERTIONS_SILENT)

    Enable silent assertions. Failed assertions will abort(), user needs to use the aborting address to find the line number with the failed assertion.

  • Disabled (sets -DNDEBUG) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_ASSERTIONS_DISABLE)

    If assertions are disabled, -DNDEBUG is added to CPPFLAGS.

CONFIG_COMPILER_FLOAT_LIB_FROM

Compiler float lib source

Found in: Compiler options

In the soft-fp part of libgcc, riscv version is written in C, and handles all edge cases in IEEE754, which makes it larger and performance is slow.

RVfplib is an optimized RISC-V library for FP arithmetic on 32-bit integer processors, for single and double-precision FP. RVfplib is “fast”, but it has a few exceptions from IEEE 754 compliance.

Available options:

  • libgcc (COMPILER_FLOAT_LIB_FROM_GCCLIB)

  • librvfp (COMPILER_FLOAT_LIB_FROM_RVFPLIB)

CONFIG_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_CHECKS_SILENT

Disable messages in ESP_RETURN_ON_* and ESP_EXIT_ON_* macros

Found in: Compiler options

If enabled, the error messages will be discarded in following check macros: - ESP_RETURN_ON_ERROR - ESP_EXIT_ON_ERROR - ESP_RETURN_ON_FALSE - ESP_EXIT_ON_FALSE

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_COMPILER_HIDE_PATHS_MACROS

Replace ESP-IDF and project paths in binaries

Found in: Compiler options

When expanding the __FILE__ and __BASE_FILE__ macros, replace paths inside ESP-IDF with paths relative to the placeholder string “IDF”, and convert paths inside the project directory to relative paths.

This allows building the project with assertions or other code that embeds file paths, without the binary containing the exact path to the IDF or project directories.

This option passes -fmacro-prefix-map options to the GCC command line. To replace additional paths in your binaries, modify the project CMakeLists.txt file to pass custom -fmacro-prefix-map or -ffile-prefix-map arguments.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_COMPILER_CXX_EXCEPTIONS

Enable C++ exceptions

Found in: Compiler options

Enabling this option compiles all IDF C++ files with exception support enabled.

Disabling this option disables C++ exception support in all compiled files, and any libstdc++ code which throws an exception will abort instead.

Enabling this option currently adds an additional ~500 bytes of heap overhead when an exception is thrown in user code for the first time.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_COMPILER_CXX_EXCEPTIONS_EMG_POOL_SIZE

Emergency Pool Size

Found in: Compiler options > CONFIG_COMPILER_CXX_EXCEPTIONS

Size (in bytes) of the emergency memory pool for C++ exceptions. This pool will be used to allocate memory for thrown exceptions when there is not enough memory on the heap.

Default value:

CONFIG_COMPILER_CXX_RTTI

Enable C++ run-time type info (RTTI)

Found in: Compiler options

Enabling this option compiles all C++ files with RTTI support enabled. This increases binary size (typically by tens of kB) but allows using dynamic_cast conversion and typeid operator.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_COMPILER_STACK_CHECK_MODE

Stack smashing protection mode

Found in: Compiler options

Stack smashing protection mode. Emit extra code to check for buffer overflows, such as stack smashing attacks. This is done by adding a guard variable to functions with vulnerable objects. The guards are initialized when a function is entered and then checked when the function exits. If a guard check fails, program is halted. Protection has the following modes:

  • In NORMAL mode (GCC flag: -fstack-protector) only functions that call alloca, and functions with buffers larger than 8 bytes are protected.

  • STRONG mode (GCC flag: -fstack-protector-strong) is like NORMAL, but includes additional functions to be protected – those that have local array definitions, or have references to local frame addresses.

  • In OVERALL mode (GCC flag: -fstack-protector-all) all functions are protected.

Modes have the following impact on code performance and coverage:

  • performance: NORMAL > STRONG > OVERALL

  • coverage: NORMAL < STRONG < OVERALL

The performance impact includes increasing the amount of stack memory required for each task.

Available options:

  • None (COMPILER_STACK_CHECK_MODE_NONE)

  • Normal (COMPILER_STACK_CHECK_MODE_NORM)

  • Strong (COMPILER_STACK_CHECK_MODE_STRONG)

  • Overall (COMPILER_STACK_CHECK_MODE_ALL)

CONFIG_COMPILER_WARN_WRITE_STRINGS

Enable -Wwrite-strings warning flag

Found in: Compiler options

Adds -Wwrite-strings flag for the C/C++ compilers.

For C, this gives string constants the type const char[] so that copying the address of one into a non-const char \* pointer produces a warning. This warning helps to find at compile time code that tries to write into a string constant.

For C++, this warns about the deprecated conversion from string literals to char \*.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_COMPILER_DUMP_RTL_FILES

Dump RTL files during compilation

Found in: Compiler options

If enabled, RTL files will be produced during compilation. These files can be used by other tools, for example to calculate call graphs.

Component config

Contains:

Application Level Tracing

Contains:

CONFIG_APPTRACE_DESTINATION1

Data Destination 1

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Select destination for application trace: JTAG or none (to disable).

Available options:

  • JTAG (APPTRACE_DEST_JTAG)

  • None (APPTRACE_DEST_NONE)

CONFIG_APPTRACE_DESTINATION2

Data Destination 2

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Select destination for application trace: UART(XX) or none (to disable).

Available options:

  • UART0 (APPTRACE_DEST_UART0)

  • UART1 (APPTRACE_DEST_UART1)

  • UART2 (APPTRACE_DEST_UART2)

  • USB_CDC (APPTRACE_DEST_USB_CDC)

  • None (APPTRACE_DEST_UART_NONE)

CONFIG_APPTRACE_UART_TX_GPIO

UART TX on GPIO#

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

This GPIO is used for UART TX pin.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_UART_RX_GPIO

UART RX on GPIO#

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

This GPIO is used for UART RX pin.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_UART_BAUDRATE

UART baud rate

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

This baud rate is used for UART.

The app’s maximum baud rate depends on the UART clock source. If Power Management is disabled, the UART clock source is the APB clock and all baud rates in the available range will be sufficiently accurate. If Power Management is enabled, REF_TICK clock source is used so the baud rate is divided from 1MHz. Baud rates above 1Mbps are not possible and values between 500Kbps and 1Mbps may not be accurate.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_UART_RX_BUFF_SIZE

UART RX ring buffer size

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Size of the UART input ring buffer. This size related to the baudrate, system tick frequency and amount of data to transfer. The data placed to this buffer before sent out to the interface.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_UART_TX_BUFF_SIZE

UART TX ring buffer size

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Size of the UART output ring buffer. This size related to the baudrate, system tick frequency and amount of data to transfer.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_UART_TX_MSG_SIZE

UART TX message size

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Maximum size of the single message to transfer.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_UART_TASK_PRIO

UART Task Priority

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

UART task priority. In case of high events rate, this parameter could be changed up to (configMAX_PRIORITIES-1).

Range:

  • from 1 to 32

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_APPTRACE_ONPANIC_HOST_FLUSH_TMO

Timeout for flushing last trace data to host on panic

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Timeout for flushing last trace data to host in case of panic. In ms. Use -1 to disable timeout and wait forever.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_POSTMORTEM_FLUSH_THRESH

Threshold for flushing last trace data to host on panic

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Threshold for flushing last trace data to host on panic in post-mortem mode. This is minimal amount of data needed to perform flush. In bytes.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_BUF_SIZE

Size of the apptrace buffer

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Size of the memory buffer for trace data in bytes.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_PENDING_DATA_SIZE_MAX

Size of the pending data buffer

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Size of the buffer for events in bytes. It is useful for buffering events from the time critical code (scheduler, ISRs etc). If this parameter is 0 then events will be discarded when main HW buffer is full.

FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Contains:

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

SystemView Tracing Enable

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables supporrt for SEGGER SystemView tracing functionality.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_DEST

SystemView destination

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

SystemView witt transfer data trough defined interface.

Available options:

  • Data destination JTAG (APPTRACE_SV_DEST_JTAG)

    Send SEGGER SystemView events through JTAG interface.

  • Data destination UART (APPTRACE_SV_DEST_UART)

    Send SEGGER SystemView events through UART interface.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_CPU

CPU to trace

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Define the CPU to trace by SystemView.

Available options:

  • CPU0 (APPTRACE_SV_DEST_CPU_0)

    Send SEGGER SystemView events for Pro CPU.

  • CPU1 (APPTRACE_SV_DEST_CPU_1)

    Send SEGGER SystemView events for App CPU.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE

Timer to use as timestamp source

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

SystemView needs to use a hardware timer as the source of timestamps when tracing. This option selects the timer for it.

Available options:

  • CPU cycle counter (CCOUNT) (APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE_CCOUNT)

  • General Purpose Timer (Timer Group) (APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE_GPTIMER)

  • esp_timer high resolution timer (APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE_ESP_TIMER)

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_MAX_TASKS

Maximum supported tasks

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Configures maximum supported tasks in sysview debug

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_BUF_WAIT_TMO

Trace buffer wait timeout

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Configures timeout (in us) to wait for free space in trace buffer. Set to -1 to wait forever and avoid lost events.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_OVERFLOW_ENABLE

Trace Buffer Overflow Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “Trace Buffer Overflow” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_ISR_ENTER_ENABLE

ISR Enter Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “ISR Enter” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_ISR_EXIT_ENABLE

ISR Exit Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “ISR Exit” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_ISR_TO_SCHED_ENABLE

ISR Exit to Scheduler Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “ISR to Scheduler” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_START_EXEC_ENABLE

Task Start Execution Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “Task Start Execution” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_STOP_EXEC_ENABLE

Task Stop Execution Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “Task Stop Execution” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_START_READY_ENABLE

Task Start Ready State Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “Task Start Ready State” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_STOP_READY_ENABLE

Task Stop Ready State Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “Task Stop Ready State” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_CREATE_ENABLE

Task Create Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “Task Create” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_TERMINATE_ENABLE

Task Terminate Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “Task Terminate” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_IDLE_ENABLE

System Idle Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “System Idle” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TIMER_ENTER_ENABLE

Timer Enter Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “Timer Enter” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TIMER_EXIT_ENABLE

Timer Exit Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables “Timer Exit” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_GCOV_ENABLE

GCOV to Host Enable

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Enables support for GCOV data transfer to host.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_GCOV_DUMP_TASK_STACK_SIZE

Gcov dump task stack size

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_GCOV_ENABLE

Configures stack size of Gcov dump task

Default value:

Bluetooth

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

Bluetooth

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth

Select this option to enable Bluetooth and show the submenu with Bluetooth configuration choices.

CONFIG_BT_HOST

Host

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

This helps to choose Bluetooth host stack

Available options:

  • Bluedroid - Dual-mode (BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED)

    This option is recommended for classic Bluetooth or for dual-mode usecases

  • NimBLE - BLE only (BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED)

    This option is recommended for BLE only usecases to save on memory

  • Disabled (BT_CONTROLLER_ONLY)

    This option is recommended when you want to communicate directly with the controller (without any host) or when you are using any other host stack not supported by Espressif (not mentioned here).

CONFIG_BT_CONTROLLER

Controller

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

This helps to choose Bluetooth controller stack

Available options:

  • Enabled (BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED)

    This option is recommended for Bluetooth controller usecases

  • Disabled (BT_CONTROLLER_DISABLED)

    This option is recommended for Bluetooth Host only usecases

Bluedroid Options

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_BTC_TASK_STACK_SIZE

Bluetooth event (callback to application) task stack size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This select btc task stack size

Default value:

  • 3072 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLUEDROID_PINNED_TO_CORE_CHOICE

The cpu core which Bluedroid run

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Which the cpu core to run Bluedroid. Can choose core0 and core1. Can not specify no-affinity.

Available options:

  • Core 0 (PRO CPU) (BT_BLUEDROID_PINNED_TO_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (APP CPU) (BT_BLUEDROID_PINNED_TO_CORE_1)

CONFIG_BT_BTU_TASK_STACK_SIZE

Bluetooth Bluedroid Host Stack task stack size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This select btu task stack size

Default value:

  • 4352 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLUEDROID_MEM_DEBUG

Bluedroid memory debug

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Bluedroid memory debug

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED

Classic Bluetooth

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

For now this option needs “SMP_ENABLE” to be set to yes

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_BQB_ENABLED

Host Qualitifcation support for Classic Bluetooth

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED

This enables functionalities of Host qualification for Classic Bluetooth.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_A2DP_ENABLE

A2DP

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED

Advanced Audio Distribution Profile

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_SPP_ENABLED

SPP

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED

This enables the Serial Port Profile

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_L2CAP_ENABLED

BT L2CAP

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED

This enables the Logical Link Control and Adaptation Layer Protocol. Only supported classic bluetooth.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_HFP_ENABLE

Hands Free/Handset Profile

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED

Hands Free Unit and Audio Gateway can be included simultaneously but they cannot run simultaneously due to internal limitations.

Default value:

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_HFP_CLIENT_ENABLE

Hands Free Unit

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_HFP_ENABLE

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_HFP_AG_ENABLE

Audio Gateway

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_HFP_ENABLE

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_HFP_AUDIO_DATA_PATH

audio(SCO) data path

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_HFP_ENABLE

SCO data path, i.e. HCI or PCM. This option is set using API “esp_bredr_sco_datapath_set” in Bluetooth host. Default SCO data path can also be set in Bluetooth Controller.

Available options:

  • PCM (BT_HFP_AUDIO_DATA_PATH_PCM)

  • HCI (BT_HFP_AUDIO_DATA_PATH_HCI)

CONFIG_BT_HFP_WBS_ENABLE

Wide Band Speech

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables Wide Band Speech. Should disable it when SCO data path is PCM. Otherwise there will be no data transmitted via GPIOs.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_HFP_AUDIO_DATA_PATH_HCI && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_HID_ENABLED

Classic BT HID

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables the BT HID Host

Default value:

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_HID_HOST_ENABLED

Classic BT HID Host

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_HID_ENABLED

This enables the BT HID Host

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_HID_DEVICE_ENABLED

Classic BT HID Device

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_HID_ENABLED

This enables the BT HID Device

CONFIG_BT_SSP_ENABLED

Secure Simple Pairing

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables the Secure Simple Pairing. If disable this option, Bluedroid will only support Legacy Pairing

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED

Bluetooth Low Energy

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables Bluetooth Low Energy

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

Include GATT server module(GATTS)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED

This option can be disabled when the app work only on gatt client mode

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTS_PPCP_CHAR_GAP

Enable Peripheral Preferred Connection Parameters characteristic in GAP service

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

This enables “Peripheral Preferred Connection Parameters” characteristic (UUID: 0x2A04) in GAP service that has connection parameters like min/max connection interval, slave latency and supervision timeout multiplier

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_BLUFI_ENABLE

Include blufi function

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

This option can be close when the app does not require blufi function.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATT_MAX_SR_PROFILES

Max GATT Server Profiles

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

Maximum GATT Server Profiles Count

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATT_MAX_SR_ATTRIBUTES

Max GATT Service Attributes

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

Maximum GATT Service Attributes Count

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTS_SEND_SERVICE_CHANGE_MODE

GATTS Service Change Mode

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

Service change indication mode for GATT Server.

Available options:

  • GATTS manually send service change indication (BT_GATTS_SEND_SERVICE_CHANGE_MANUAL)

    Manually send service change indication through API esp_ble_gatts_send_service_change_indication()

  • GATTS automatically send service change indication (BT_GATTS_SEND_SERVICE_CHANGE_AUTO)

    Let Bluedroid handle the service change indication internally

CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ROBUST_CACHING_ENABLED

Enable Robust Caching on Server Side

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

This option enables the GATT robust caching feature on the server. if turned on, the Client Supported Features characteristic, Database Hash characteristic, and Server Supported Features characteristic will be included in the GAP SERVICE.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTS_DEVICE_NAME_WRITABLE

Allow to write device name by GATT clients

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

Enabling this option allows remote GATT clients to write device name

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTS_APPEARANCE_WRITABLE

Allow to write appearance by GATT clients

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

Enabling this option allows remote GATT clients to write appearance

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTC_ENABLE

Include GATT client module(GATTC)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED

This option can be close when the app work only on gatt server mode

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTC_MAX_CACHE_CHAR

Max gattc cache characteristic for discover

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTC_ENABLE

Maximum GATTC cache characteristic count

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTC_NOTIF_REG_MAX

Max gattc notify(indication) register number

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTC_ENABLE

Maximum GATTC notify(indication) register number

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTC_CACHE_NVS_FLASH

Save gattc cache data to nvs flash

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTC_ENABLE

This select can save gattc cache data to nvs flash

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTC_CONNECT_RETRY_COUNT

The number of attempts to reconnect if the connection establishment failed

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTC_ENABLE

The number of attempts to reconnect if the connection establishment failed

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_SMP_ENABLE

Include BLE security module(SMP)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED

This option can be close when the app not used the ble security connect.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_SMP_SLAVE_CON_PARAMS_UPD_ENABLE

Slave enable connection parameters update during pairing

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_BLE_SMP_ENABLE

In order to reduce the pairing time, slave actively initiates connection parameters update during pairing.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_SMP_ID_RESET_ENABLE

Reset device identity when all bonding records are deleted

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_BLE_SMP_ENABLE

There are tracking risks associated with using a fixed or static IRK. If enabled this option, Bluedroid will assign a new randomly-generated IRK when all pairing and bonding records are deleted. This would decrease the ability of a previously paired peer to be used to determine whether a device with which it previously shared an IRK is within range.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_STACK_NO_LOG

Disable BT debug logs (minimize bin size)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This select can save the rodata code size

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL

HCI layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for HCI layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL

BTM layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for BTM layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL

L2CAP layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for L2CAP layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL

RFCOMM layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for RFCOMM layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL

SDP layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for SDP layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL

GAP layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for GAP layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL

BNEP layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for BNEP layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL

PAN layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for PAN layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL

A2D layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for A2D layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL

AVDT layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for AVDT layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL

AVCT layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for AVCT layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL

AVRC layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for AVRC layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL

MCA layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for MCA layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL

HID layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for HID layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL

APPL layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for APPL layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL

GATT layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for GATT layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL

SMP layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for SMP layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL

BTIF layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for BTIF layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL

BTC layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for BTC layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL

OSI layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for OSI layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL

BLUFI layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for BLUFI layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_ACL_CONNECTIONS

BT/BLE MAX ACL CONNECTIONS(1~9)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Maximum BT/BLE connection count. The ESP32-C3/S3 chip supports a maximum of 10 instances, including ADV, SCAN and connections. The ESP32-C3/S3 chip can connect up to 9 devices if ADV or SCAN uses only one. If ADV and SCAN are both used, The ESP32-C3/S3 chip is connected to a maximum of 8 devices. Because Bluetooth cannot reclaim used instances once ADV or SCAN is used.

Range:

  • from 1 to 9 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 4 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_MULTI_CONNECTION_ENBALE

Enable BLE multi-connections

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Enable this option if there are multiple connections

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_ALLOCATION_FROM_SPIRAM_FIRST

BT/BLE will first malloc the memory from the PSRAM

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This select can save the internal RAM if there have the PSRAM

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLE_DYNAMIC_ENV_MEMORY

Use dynamic memory allocation in BT/BLE stack

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This select can make the allocation of memory will become more flexible

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLE_HOST_QUEUE_CONG_CHECK

BLE queue congestion check

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

When scanning and scan duplicate is not enabled, if there are a lot of adv packets around or application layer handling adv packets is slow, it will cause the controller memory to run out. if enabled, adv packets will be lost when host queue is congested.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_SMP_MAX_BONDS

BT/BLE maximum bond device count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

The number of security records for peer devices.

CONFIG_BT_BLE_ACT_SCAN_REP_ADV_SCAN

Report adv data and scan response individually when BLE active scan

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Originally, when doing BLE active scan, Bluedroid will not report adv to application layer until receive scan response. This option is used to disable the behavior. When enable this option, Bluedroid will report adv data or scan response to application layer immediately.

# Memory reserved at start of DRAM for Bluetooth stack

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_MAX_DEVICE_NAME_LEN

length of bluetooth device name

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Bluetooth Device name length shall be no larger than 248 octets, If the broadcast data cannot contain the complete device name, then only the shortname will be displayed, the rest parts that can’t fit in will be truncated.

Range:

  • from 32 to 248 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 32 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLE_RPA_SUPPORTED

Update RPA to Controller

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables controller RPA list function. For ESP32, ESP32 only support network privacy mode. If this option is enabled, ESP32 will only accept advertising packets from peer devices that contain private address, HW will not receive the advertising packets contain identity address after IRK changed. If this option is disabled, address resolution will be performed in the host, so the functions that require controller to resolve address in the white list cannot be used. This option is disabled by default on ESP32, please enable or disable this option according to your own needs.

For other BLE chips, devices support network privacy mode and device privacy mode, users can switch the two modes according to their own needs. So this option is enabled by default.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLE_RPA_TIMEOUT

Timeout of resolvable private address

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This set RPA timeout of Controller and Host. Default is 900 s (15 minutes). Range is 1 s to 1 hour (3600 s).

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_50_FEATURES_SUPPORTED

Enable BLE 5.0 features

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Enabling this option activates BLE 5.0 features. This option is universally supported in chips that support BLE, except for ESP32.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_42_FEATURES_SUPPORTED

Enable BLE 4.2 features

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables BLE 4.2 features.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_FEAT_PERIODIC_ADV_SYNC_TRANSFER

Enable BLE periodic advertising sync transfer feature

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables BLE periodic advertising sync transfer feature

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_FEAT_PERIODIC_ADV_ENH

Enable periodic adv enhancements(adi support)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Enable the periodic advertising enhancements

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_FEAT_CREATE_SYNC_ENH

Enable create sync enhancements(reporting disable and duplicate filtering enable support)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Enable the create sync enhancements

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_HIGH_DUTY_ADV_INTERVAL

Enable BLE high duty advertising interval feature

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enable BLE high duty advertising interval feature

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_ABORT_WHEN_ALLOCATION_FAILS

Abort when memory allocation fails in BT/BLE stack

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables abort when memory allocation fails

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

NimBLE Options

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MEM_ALLOC_MODE

Memory allocation strategy

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Allocation strategy for NimBLE host stack, essentially provides ability to allocate all required dynamic allocations from,

  • Internal DRAM memory only

  • External SPIRAM memory only

  • Either internal or external memory based on default malloc() behavior in ESP-IDF

  • Internal IRAM memory wherever applicable else internal DRAM

Available options:

  • Internal memory (BT_NIMBLE_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_INTERNAL)

  • External SPIRAM (BT_NIMBLE_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_EXTERNAL)

  • Default alloc mode (BT_NIMBLE_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_DEFAULT)

  • Internal IRAM (BT_NIMBLE_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_IRAM_8BIT)

    Allows to use IRAM memory region as 8bit accessible region.

    Every unaligned (8bit or 16bit) access will result in an exception and incur penalty of certain clock cycles per unaligned read/write.

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL

NimBLE Host log verbosity

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Select NimBLE log level. Please make a note that the selected NimBLE log verbosity can not exceed the level set in “Component config –> Log output –> Default log verbosity”.

Available options:

  • No logs (BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL_NONE)

  • Error logs (BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • Warning logs (BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • Info logs (BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug logs (BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL_DEBUG)

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_CONNECTIONS

Maximum number of concurrent connections

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Defines maximum number of concurrent BLE connections. For ESP32, user is expected to configure BTDM_CTRL_BLE_MAX_CONN from controller menu along with this option. Similarly for ESP32-C3 or ESP32-S3, user is expected to configure BT_CTRL_BLE_MAX_ACT from controller menu. For ESP32C2, ESP32C6 and ESP32H2, each connection will take about 1k DRAM.

Range:

  • from 1 to 9 if SOC_ESP_NIMBLE_CONTROLLER && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_BONDS

Maximum number of bonds to save across reboots

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Defines maximum number of bonds to save for peer security and our security

Default value:

  • 3 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_CCCDS

Maximum number of CCC descriptors to save across reboots

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Defines maximum number of CCC descriptors to save

Default value:

  • 8 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_L2CAP_COC_MAX_NUM

Maximum number of connection oriented channels

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Defines maximum number of BLE Connection Oriented Channels. When set to (0), BLE COC is not compiled in

Range:

  • from 0 to 9 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 0 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_PINNED_TO_CORE_CHOICE

The CPU core on which NimBLE host will run

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

The CPU core on which NimBLE host will run. You can choose Core 0 or Core 1. Cannot specify no-affinity

Available options:

  • Core 0 (PRO CPU) (BT_NIMBLE_PINNED_TO_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (APP CPU) (BT_NIMBLE_PINNED_TO_CORE_1)

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HOST_TASK_STACK_SIZE

NimBLE Host task stack size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This configures stack size of NimBLE host task

Default value:

  • 5120 if CONFIG_BLE_MESH && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

  • 4096 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ROLE_CENTRAL

Enable BLE Central role

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enables central role

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ROLE_PERIPHERAL

Enable BLE Peripheral role

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable peripheral role

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ROLE_BROADCASTER

Enable BLE Broadcaster role

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enables broadcaster role

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ROLE_OBSERVER

Enable BLE Observer role

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enables observer role

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_NVS_PERSIST

Persist the BLE Bonding keys in NVS

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable this flag to make bonding persistent across device reboots

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SMP_ID_RESET

Reset device identity when all bonding records are deleted

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

There are tracking risks associated with using a fixed or static IRK. If enabled this option, Bluedroid will assign a new randomly-generated IRK when all pairing and bonding records are deleted. This would decrease the ability of a previously paired peer to be used to determine whether a device with which it previously shared an IRK is within range.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SECURITY_ENABLE

Enable BLE SM feature

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable BLE sm feature

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SM_LEGACY

Security manager legacy pairing

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SECURITY_ENABLE

Enable security manager legacy pairing

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SM_SC

Security manager secure connections (4.2)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SECURITY_ENABLE

Enable security manager secure connections

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SM_SC_DEBUG_KEYS

Use predefined public-private key pair

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SECURITY_ENABLE > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SM_SC

If this option is enabled, SM uses predefined DH key pair as described in Core Specification, Vol. 3, Part H, 2.3.5.6.1. This allows to decrypt air traffic easily and thus should only be used for debugging.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_LL_CFG_FEAT_LE_ENCRYPTION

Enable LE encryption

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SECURITY_ENABLE

Enable encryption connection

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_DEBUG

Enable extra runtime asserts and host debugging

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This enables extra runtime asserts and host debugging

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SVC_GAP_DEVICE_NAME

BLE GAP default device name

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

The Device Name characteristic shall contain the name of the device as an UTF-8 string. This name can be changed by using API ble_svc_gap_device_name_set()

Default value:

  • “nimble” if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_GAP_DEVICE_NAME_MAX_LEN

Maximum length of BLE device name in octets

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Device Name characteristic value shall be 0 to 248 octets in length

Default value:

  • 31 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ATT_PREFERRED_MTU

Preferred MTU size in octets

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This is the default value of ATT MTU indicated by the device during an ATT MTU exchange. This value can be changed using API ble_att_set_preferred_mtu()

Default value:

  • 256 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SVC_GAP_APPEARANCE

External appearance of the device

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Standard BLE GAP Appearance value in HEX format e.g. 0x02C0

Default value:

  • 0 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Memory Settings

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MSYS_1_BLOCK_COUNT

MSYS_1 Block Count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > Memory Settings

MSYS is a system level mbuf registry. For prepare write & prepare responses MBUFs are allocated out of msys_1 pool. For NIMBLE_MESH enabled cases, this block count is increased by 8 than user defined count.

Default value:

  • 24 if SOC_ESP_NIMBLE_CONTROLLER && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

  • 12 if SOC_ESP_NIMBLE_CONTROLLER && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MSYS_1_BLOCK_SIZE

MSYS_1 Block Size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > Memory Settings

Dynamic memory size of block 1

Default value:

  • 128 if SOC_ESP_NIMBLE_CONTROLLER && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

  • 256 if SOC_ESP_NIMBLE_CONTROLLER && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MSYS_2_BLOCK_COUNT

MSYS_2 Block Count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > Memory Settings

Dynamic memory count

Default value:

  • 24 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MSYS_2_BLOCK_SIZE

MSYS_2 Block Size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > Memory Settings

Dynamic memory size of block 2

Default value:

  • 320 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ACL_BUF_COUNT

ACL Buffer count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > Memory Settings

The number of ACL data buffers.

Default value:

  • 24 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ACL_BUF_SIZE

ACL Buffer size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > Memory Settings

This is the maximum size of the data portion of HCI ACL data packets. It does not include the HCI data header (of 4 bytes)

Default value:

  • 255 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HCI_EVT_BUF_SIZE

HCI Event Buffer size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > Memory Settings

This is the size of each HCI event buffer in bytes. In case of extended advertising, packets can be fragmented. 257 bytes is the maximum size of a packet.

Default value:

  • 257 if CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_ADV && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

  • 70 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HCI_EVT_HI_BUF_COUNT

High Priority HCI Event Buffer count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > Memory Settings

This is the high priority HCI events’ buffer size. High-priority event buffers are for everything except advertising reports. If there are no free high-priority event buffers then host will try to allocate a low-priority buffer instead

Default value:

  • 30 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HCI_EVT_LO_BUF_COUNT

Low Priority HCI Event Buffer count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > Memory Settings

This is the low priority HCI events’ buffer size. Low-priority event buffers are only used for advertising reports. If there are no free low-priority event buffers, then an incoming advertising report will get dropped

Default value:

  • 8 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_GATT_MAX_PROCS

Maximum number of GATT client procedures

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Maximum number of GATT client procedures that can be executed.

Default value:

  • 4 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL

Enable Host Flow control

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable Host Flow control

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL_ITVL

Host Flow control interval

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL

Host flow control interval in msecs

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL_THRESH

Host Flow control threshold

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL

Host flow control threshold, if the number of free buffers are at or below this threshold, send an immediate number-of-completed-packets event

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL_TX_ON_DISCONNECT

Host Flow control on disconnect

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL

Enable this option to send number-of-completed-packets event to controller after disconnection

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_RPA_TIMEOUT

RPA timeout in seconds

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Time interval between RPA address change.

Range:

  • from 1 to 41400 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 900 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable BLE mesh functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable BLE Mesh example present in upstream mynewt-nimble and not maintained by Espressif.

IDF maintains ESP-BLE-MESH as the official Mesh solution. Please refer to ESP-BLE-MESH guide at: :doc:../esp32/api-guides/esp-ble-mesh/ble-mesh-index``

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PROXY

Enable mesh proxy functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable proxy. This is automatically set whenever NIMBLE_MESH_PB_GATT or NIMBLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY is set

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PROV

Enable BLE mesh provisioning

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable mesh provisioning

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PB_ADV

Enable mesh provisioning over advertising bearer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PROV

Enable this option to allow the device to be provisioned over the advertising bearer

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PB_GATT

Enable mesh provisioning over GATT bearer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PROV

Enable this option to allow the device to be provisioned over the GATT bearer

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY

Enable GATT Proxy functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

This option enables support for the Mesh GATT Proxy Service, i.e. the ability to act as a proxy between a Mesh GATT Client and a Mesh network

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_RELAY

Enable mesh relay functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Support for acting as a Mesh Relay Node

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Enable mesh low power mode

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable this option to be able to act as a Low Power Node

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_FRIEND

Enable mesh friend functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable this option to be able to act as a Friend Node

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_DEVICE_NAME

Set mesh device name

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

This value defines Bluetooth Mesh device/node name

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_NODE_COUNT

Set mesh node count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Defines mesh node count.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

Enable BLE mesh provisioner

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable mesh provisioner.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_CRYPTO_STACK_MBEDTLS

Override TinyCrypt with mbedTLS for crypto computations

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable this option to choose mbedTLS instead of TinyCrypt for crypto computations.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_STOP_TIMEOUT_MS

BLE host stop timeout in msec

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

BLE Host stop procedure timeout in milliseconds.

Default value:

  • 2000 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HOST_BASED_PRIVACY

Enable host based privacy for random address.

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Use this option to do host based Random Private Address resolution. If this option is disabled then controller based privacy is used.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENABLE_CONN_REATTEMPT

Enable connection reattempts on connection establishment error

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable to make the NimBLE host to reattempt GAP connection on connection establishment failure.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_CONN_REATTEMPT

Maximum number connection reattempts

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENABLE_CONN_REATTEMPT

Defines maximum number of connection reattempts.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT

Enable BLE 5 feature

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable BLE 5 feature

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && (SOC_BLE_50_SUPPORTED || BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED) && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_LL_CFG_FEAT_LE_2M_PHY

Enable 2M Phy

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT

Enable 2M-PHY

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_LL_CFG_FEAT_LE_CODED_PHY

Enable coded Phy

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT

Enable coded-PHY

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_ADV

Enable extended advertising

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT

Enable this option to do extended advertising. Extended advertising will be supported from BLE 5.0 onwards.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_EXT_ADV_INSTANCES

Maximum number of extended advertising instances.

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_ADV

Change this option to set maximum number of extended advertising instances. Minimum there is always one instance of advertising. Enter how many more advertising instances you want. For ESP32C2, ESP32C6 and ESP32H2, each extended advertising instance will take about 0.5k DRAM.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_ADV_MAX_SIZE

Maximum length of the advertising data.

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_ADV

Defines the length of the extended adv data. The value should not exceed 1650.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENABLE_PERIODIC_ADV

Enable periodic advertisement.

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_ADV

Enable this option to start periodic advertisement.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_PERIODIC_ADV_ENH

Periodic adv enhancements(adi support)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_ADV > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENABLE_PERIODIC_ADV

Enable the periodic advertising enhancements

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_PERIODIC_ADV_SYNC_TRANSFER

Enable Transfer Sync Events

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_ADV > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENABLE_PERIODIC_ADV

This enables controller transfer periodic sync events to host

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_SCAN

Enable extended scanning

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT

Enable this option to do extended scanning.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENABLE_PERIODIC_SYNC

Enable periodic sync

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_SCAN

Enable this option to receive periodic advertisement.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_PERIODIC_SYNCS

Maximum number of periodic advertising syncs

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_SCAN > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENABLE_PERIODIC_SYNC

Set this option to set the upper limit for number of periodic sync connections. This should be less than maximum connections allowed by controller.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_PERIODIC_ADVERTISER_LIST

Maximum number of periodic advertiser list

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_EXT_SCAN > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENABLE_PERIODIC_SYNC

Set this option to set the upper limit for number of periodic advertiser list.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_BLE_POWER_CONTROL

Enable support for BLE Power Control

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_50_FEATURE_SUPPORT

Set this option to enable the Power Control feature

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_WHITELIST_SIZE

BLE white list size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

BLE list size

Range:

  • from 1 to 15 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 12 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_TEST_THROUGHPUT_TEST

Throughput Test Mode enable

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable the throughput test mode

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_BLUFI_ENABLE

Enable blufi functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Set this option to enable blufi functionality.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_USE_ESP_TIMER

Enable Esp Timer for Nimble

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Set this option to use Esp Timer which has higher priority timer instead of FreeRTOS timer

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_BLE_GATT_BLOB_TRANSFER

Blob transfer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This option is used when data to be sent is more than 512 bytes. For peripheral role, BT_NIMBLE_MSYS_1_BLOCK_COUNT needs to be increased according to the need.

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HIGH_DUTY_ADV_ITVL

Enable BLE high duty advertising interval feature

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This enable BLE high duty advertising interval feature

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HOST_QUEUE_CONG_CHECK

BLE queue congestion check

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

When scanning and scan duplicate is not enabled, if there are a lot of adv packets around or application layer handling adv packets is slow, it will cause the controller memory to run out. if enabled, adv packets will be lost when host queue is congested.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_VS_SUPPORT

Enable support for VSC and VSE

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This option is used to enable support for sending Vendor Specific HCI commands and handling Vendor Specific HCI Events.

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENC_ADV_DATA

Encrypted Advertising Data

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This option is used to enable encrypted advertising data.

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_EADS

Maximum number of EAD devices to save across reboots

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENC_ADV_DATA

Defines maximum number of encrypted advertising data key material to save

Default value:
Controller Options

Contains:

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_MODE

Bluetooth controller mode (BR/EDR/BLE/DUALMODE)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

Specify the bluetooth controller mode (BR/EDR, BLE or dual mode).

Available options:

  • BLE Only (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY)

  • BR/EDR Only (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BR_EDR_ONLY)

  • Bluetooth Dual Mode (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM)

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_BLE_MAX_CONN

BLE Max Connections

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

BLE maximum connections of bluetooth controller. Each connection uses 1KB static DRAM whenever the BT controller is enabled.

Range:

  • from 1 to 9 if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 3 if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_MAX_ACL_CONN

BR/EDR ACL Max Connections

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

BR/EDR ACL maximum connections of bluetooth controller. Each connection uses 1.2 KB DRAM whenever the BT controller is enabled.

Range:

  • from 1 to 7 if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BR_EDR_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 2 if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BR_EDR_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_MAX_SYNC_CONN

BR/EDR Sync(SCO/eSCO) Max Connections

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

BR/EDR Synchronize maximum connections of bluetooth controller. Each connection uses 2 KB DRAM whenever the BT controller is enabled.

Range:

  • from 0 to 3 if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BR_EDR_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 0 if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BR_EDR_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_SCO_DATA_PATH

BR/EDR Sync(SCO/eSCO) default data path

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

SCO data path, i.e. HCI or PCM. SCO data can be sent/received through HCI synchronous packets, or the data can be routed to on-chip PCM module on ESP32. PCM input/output signals can be “matrixed” to GPIOs. The default data path can also be set using API “esp_bredr_sco_datapath_set”

Available options:

  • HCI (BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_SCO_DATA_PATH_HCI)

  • PCM (BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_SCO_DATA_PATH_PCM)

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE_EDGE_CONFIG

PCM Signal Config (Role and Polar)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_SCO_DATA_PATH_PCM && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

Contains:

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE

PCM Role

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE_EDGE_CONFIG

PCM role can be configured as PCM master or PCM slave

Available options:

  • PCM Master (BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE_MASTER)

  • PCM Slave (BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE_SLAVE)

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PCM_POLAR

PCM Polar

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE_EDGE_CONFIG

PCM polarity can be configured as Falling Edge or Rising Edge

Available options:

  • Falling Edge (BTDM_CTRL_PCM_POLAR_FALLING_EDGE)

  • Rising Edge (BTDM_CTRL_PCM_POLAR_RISING_EDGE)

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_AUTO_LATENCY

Auto latency

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

BLE auto latency, used to enhance classic BT performance while classic BT and BLE are enabled at the same time.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_LEGACY_AUTH_VENDOR_EVT

Legacy Authentication Vendor Specific Event Enable

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

To protect from BIAS attack during Legacy authentication, Legacy authentication Vendor specific event should be enabled

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BR_EDR_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PINNED_TO_CORE_CHOICE

The cpu core which bluetooth controller run

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

Specify the cpu core to run bluetooth controller. Can not specify no-affinity.

Available options:

  • Core 0 (PRO CPU) (BTDM_CTRL_PINNED_TO_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (APP CPU) (BTDM_CTRL_PINNED_TO_CORE_1)

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_CHOICE

HCI mode

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

Specify HCI mode as VHCI or UART(H4)

Available options:

  • VHCI (BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_VHCI)

    Normal option. Mostly, choose this VHCI when bluetooth host run on ESP32, too.

  • UART(H4) (BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_UART_H4)

    If use external bluetooth host which run on other hardware and use UART as the HCI interface, choose this option.

HCI UART(H4) Options

Contains:

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_HCI_UART_NO

UART Number for HCI

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > HCI UART(H4) Options

Uart number for HCI. The available uart is UART1 and UART2.

Range:

  • from 1 to 2 if BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_UART_H4 && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 1 if BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_UART_H4 && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_HCI_UART_BAUDRATE

UART Baudrate for HCI

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > HCI UART(H4) Options

UART Baudrate for HCI. Please use standard baudrate.

Range:

  • from 115200 to 921600 if BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_UART_H4 && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 921600 if BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_UART_H4 && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_HCI_UART_FLOW_CTRL_EN

Enable UART flow control

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > HCI UART(H4) Options

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_UART_H4 && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

MODEM SLEEP Options

Contains:

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_MODEM_SLEEP

Bluetooth modem sleep

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > MODEM SLEEP Options

Enable/disable bluetooth controller low power mode.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_MODEM_SLEEP_MODE

Bluetooth Modem sleep mode

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > MODEM SLEEP Options > CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_MODEM_SLEEP

To select which strategy to use for modem sleep

Available options:

  • ORIG Mode(sleep with low power clock) (BTDM_CTRL_MODEM_SLEEP_MODE_ORIG)

    ORIG mode is a bluetooth sleep mode that can be used for dual mode controller. In this mode, bluetooth controller sleeps between BR/EDR frames and BLE events. A low power clock is used to maintain bluetooth reference clock.

  • EVED Mode(For internal test only) (BTDM_CTRL_MODEM_SLEEP_MODE_EVED)

    EVED mode is for BLE only and is only for internal test. Do not use it for production. this mode is not compatible with DFS nor light sleep

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_LOW_POWER_CLOCK

Bluetooth low power clock

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > MODEM SLEEP Options

Select the low power clock source for bluetooth controller. Bluetooth low power clock is the clock source to maintain time in sleep mode.

  • “Main crystal” option provides good accuracy and can support Dynamic Frequency Scaling to be used with Bluetooth modem sleep. Light sleep is not supported.

  • “External 32kHz crystal” option allows user to use a 32.768kHz crystal as Bluetooth low power clock. This option is allowed as long as External 32kHz crystal is configured as the system RTC clock source. This option provides good accuracy and supports Bluetooth modem sleep to be used alongside Dynamic Frequency Scaling or light sleep.

Available options:

  • Main crystal (BTDM_CTRL_LPCLK_SEL_MAIN_XTAL)

    Main crystal can be used as low power clock for bluetooth modem sleep. If this option is selected, bluetooth modem sleep can work under Dynamic Frequency Scaling(DFS) enabled, but cannot work when light sleep is enabled. Main crystal has a good performance in accuracy as the bluetooth low power clock source.

  • External 32kHz crystal/oscillator (BTDM_CTRL_LPCLK_SEL_EXT_32K_XTAL)

    External 32kHz crystal/oscillator has a nominal frequency of 32.768kHz and provides good frequency stability. If used as Bluetooth low power clock, External 32kHz can support Bluetooth modem sleep to be used with both DFS and light sleep.

CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SLEEP_CLOCK_ACCURACY

BLE Sleep Clock Accuracy

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

BLE Sleep Clock Accuracy(SCA) for the local device is used to estimate window widening in BLE connection events. With a lower level of clock accuracy(e.g. 500ppm over 250ppm), the slave needs a larger RX window to synchronize with master in each anchor point, thus resulting in an increase of power consumption but a higher level of robustness in keeping connected. According to the requirements of Bluetooth Core specification 4.2, the worst-case accuracy of Classic Bluetooth low power oscialltor(LPO) is +/-250ppm in STANDBY and in low power modes such as sniff. For BLE the worst-case SCA is +/-500ppm.

  • “151ppm to 250ppm” option is the default value for Bluetooth Dual mode

  • “251ppm to 500ppm” option can be used in BLE only mode when using external 32kHz crystal as

    low power clock. This option is provided in case that BLE sleep clock has a lower level of accuracy, or other error sources contribute to the inaccurate timing during sleep.

Available options:

  • 251ppm to 500ppm (BTDM_BLE_DEFAULT_SCA_500PPM)

  • 151ppm to 250ppm (BTDM_BLE_DEFAULT_SCA_250PPM)

CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL

BLE Scan Duplicate Options

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

This select enables parameters setting of BLE scan duplicate.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_TYPE

Scan Duplicate Type

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL

Scan duplicate have three ways. one is “Scan Duplicate By Device Address”, This way is to use advertiser address filtering. The adv packet of the same address is only allowed to be reported once. Another way is “Scan Duplicate By Device Address And Advertising Data”. This way is to use advertising data and device address filtering. All different adv packets with the same address are allowed to be reported. The last way is “Scan Duplicate By Advertising Data”. This way is to use advertising data filtering. All same advertising data only allow to be reported once even though they are from different devices.

Available options:

  • Scan Duplicate By Device Address (BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_TYPE_DEVICE)

    This way is to use advertiser address filtering. The adv packet of the same address is only allowed to be reported once

  • Scan Duplicate By Advertising Data (BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_TYPE_DATA)

    This way is to use advertising data filtering. All same advertising data only allow to be reported once even though they are from different devices.

  • Scan Duplicate By Device Address And Advertising Data (BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_TYPE_DATA_DEVICE)

    This way is to use advertising data and device address filtering. All different adv packets with the same address are allowed to be reported.

CONFIG_BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_CACHE_SIZE

Maximum number of devices in scan duplicate filter

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL

Maximum number of devices which can be recorded in scan duplicate filter. When the maximum amount of device in the filter is reached, the oldest device will be refreshed.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_CACHE_REFRESH_PERIOD

Duplicate scan list refresh period (seconds)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL

If the period value is non-zero, the controller will periodically clear the device information stored in the scan duuplicate filter. If it is 0, the scan duuplicate filter will not be cleared until the scanning is disabled. Duplicate advertisements for this period should not be sent to the Host in advertising report events. There are two scenarios where the ADV packet will be repeatedly reported: 1. The duplicate scan cache is full, the controller will delete the oldest device information and add new device information. 2. When the refresh period is up, the controller will clear all device information and start filtering again.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_MESH_SCAN_DUPL_EN

Special duplicate scan mechanism for BLE Mesh scan

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL

This enables the BLE scan duplicate for special BLE Mesh scan.

Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_MESH_DUPL_SCAN_CACHE_SIZE

Maximum number of Mesh adv packets in scan duplicate filter

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_MESH_SCAN_DUPL_EN

Maximum number of adv packets which can be recorded in duplicate scan cache for BLE Mesh. When the maximum amount of device in the filter is reached, the cache will be refreshed.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_FULL_SCAN_SUPPORTED

BLE full scan feature supported

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

The full scan function is mainly used to provide BLE scan performance. This is required for scenes with high scan performance requirements, such as BLE Mesh scenes.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_SCAN_BACKOFF_UPPERLIMITMAX

Disable active scan backoff

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

Disable active scan backoff. The bluetooth spec requires that scanners should run a backoff procedure to minimize collision of scan request PDUs from nultiple scanners. If scan backoff is disabled, in active scanning, scan request PDU will be sent every time when HW receives scannable ADV PDU.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_CHECK_CONNECT_IND_ACCESS_ADDRESS

Enable enhanced Access Address check in CONNECT_IND

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

Enabling this option will add stricter verification of the Access Address in the CONNECT_IND PDU. This improves security by ensuring that only connection requests with valid Access Addresses are accepted. If disabled, only basic checks are applied, improving compatibility.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_SUPP

BLE adv report flow control supported

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

The function is mainly used to enable flow control for advertising reports. When it is enabled, advertising reports will be discarded by the controller if the number of unprocessed advertising reports exceeds the size of BLE adv report flow control.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_NUM

BLE adv report flow control number

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_SUPP

The number of unprocessed advertising report that Bluedroid can save.If you set BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_NUM to a small value, this may cause adv packets lost. If you set BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_NUM to a large value, Bluedroid may cache a lot of adv packets and this may cause system memory run out. For example, if you set it to 50, the maximum memory consumed by host is 35 * 50 bytes. Please set BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_NUM according to your system free memory and handle adv packets as fast as possible, otherwise it will cause adv packets lost.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_DISCARD_THRSHOLD

BLE adv lost event threshold value

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_SUPP

When adv report flow control is enabled, The ADV lost event will be generated when the number of ADV packets lost in the controller reaches this threshold. It is better to set a larger value. If you set BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_DISCARD_THRSHOLD to a small value or printf every adv lost event, it may cause adv packets lost more.

Range:
Default value:
BLE disconnect when instant passed

Contains:

CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_LLCP_CONN_UPDATE

BLE ACL connection update procedure

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > BLE disconnect when instant passed

If this option is enabled, Controller will terminate the connection when instant passed during connection update procedure.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_LLCP_CHAN_MAP_UPDATE

BLE ACL channel map update procedure

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options > BLE disconnect when instant passed

If this option is enabled, Controller will terminate the connection when instant passed in channel map update procedure.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && BT_CONTROLLER_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_HLI

High level interrupt

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Controller Options

Using Level 4 interrupt for Bluetooth.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_RELEASE_IRAM

Release Bluetooth text (READ DOCS FIRST)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth

This option release Bluetooth text section and merge Bluetooth data, bss & text into a large free heap region when esp_bt_mem_release is called, total saving ~21kB or more of IRAM. ESP32-C2 only 3 configurable PMP entries available, rest of them are hard-coded. We cannot split the memory into 3 different regions (IRAM, BLE-IRAM, DRAM). So this option will disable the PMP (ESP_SYSTEM_PMP_IDRAM_SPLIT)

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_HCI_LOG_DEBUG_EN

Enable Bluetooth HCI debug mode

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth

This option is used to enable bluetooth debug mode, which saves the hci layer data stream.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED || BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_HCI_LOG_DATA_BUFFER_SIZE

Size of the cache used for HCI data in Bluetooth HCI debug mode (N*1024 bytes)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_HCI_LOG_DEBUG_EN

This option is to configure the buffer size of the hci data steam cache in hci debug mode. This is a ring buffer, the new data will overwrite the oldest data if the buffer is full.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_HCI_LOG_ADV_BUFFER_SIZE

Size of the cache used for adv report in Bluetooth HCI debug mode (N*1024 bytes)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_HCI_LOG_DEBUG_EN

This option is to configure the buffer size of the hci adv report cache in hci debug mode. This is a ring buffer, the new data will overwrite the oldest data if the buffer is full.

Range:
Default value:
Common Options

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_ALARM_MAX_NUM

Maximum number of Bluetooth alarms

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Common Options

This option decides the maximum number of alarms which could be used by Bluetooth host.

Default value:

  • 50

CONFIG_BLE_MESH

ESP BLE Mesh Support

Found in: Component config

This option enables ESP BLE Mesh support. The specific features that are available may depend on other features that have been enabled in the stack, such as Bluetooth Support, Bluedroid Support & GATT support.

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_HCI_5_0

Support sending 20ms non-connectable adv packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

It is a temporary solution and needs further modifications.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RANDOM_ADV_INTERVAL

Support using random adv interval for mesh packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to allow using random advertising interval for mesh packets. And this could help avoid collision of advertising packets.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_USE_DUPLICATE_SCAN

Support Duplicate Scan in BLE Mesh

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to allow using specific duplicate scan filter in BLE Mesh, and Scan Duplicate Type must be set by choosing the option in the Bluetooth Controller section in menuconfig, which is “Scan Duplicate By Device Address and Advertising Data”.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MEM_ALLOC_MODE

Memory allocation strategy

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Allocation strategy for BLE Mesh stack, essentially provides ability to allocate all required dynamic allocations from,

  • Internal DRAM memory only

  • External SPIRAM memory only

  • Either internal or external memory based on default malloc() behavior in ESP-IDF

  • Internal IRAM memory wherever applicable else internal DRAM

Recommended mode here is always internal (*), since that is most preferred from security perspective. But if application requirement does not allow sufficient free internal memory then alternate mode can be selected.

(*) In case of ESP32-S2/ESP32-S3, hardware allows encryption of external SPIRAM contents provided hardware flash encryption feature is enabled. In that case, using external SPIRAM allocation strategy is also safe choice from security perspective.

Available options:

  • Internal DRAM (BLE_MESH_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_INTERNAL)

  • External SPIRAM (BLE_MESH_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_EXTERNAL)

  • Default alloc mode (BLE_MESH_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_DEFAULT)

    Enable this option to use the default memory allocation strategy when external SPIRAM is enabled. See the SPIRAM options for more details.

  • Internal IRAM (BLE_MESH_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_IRAM_8BIT)

    Allows to use IRAM memory region as 8bit accessible region. Every unaligned (8bit or 16bit) access will result in an exception and incur penalty of certain clock cycles per unaligned read/write.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FREERTOS_STATIC_ALLOC

Enable FreeRTOS static allocation

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to use FreeRTOS static allocation APIs for BLE Mesh, which provides the ability to use different dynamic memory (i.e. SPIRAM or IRAM) for FreeRTOS objects. If this option is disabled, the FreeRTOS static allocation APIs will not be used, and internal DRAM will be allocated for FreeRTOS objects.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FREERTOS_STATIC_ALLOC_MODE

Memory allocation for FreeRTOS objects

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FREERTOS_STATIC_ALLOC

Choose the memory to be used for FreeRTOS objects.

Available options:

  • External SPIRAM (BLE_MESH_FREERTOS_STATIC_ALLOC_EXTERNAL)

    If enabled, BLE Mesh allocates dynamic memory from external SPIRAM for FreeRTOS objects, i.e. mutex, queue, and task stack. External SPIRAM can only be used for task stack when SPIRAM_ALLOW_STACK_EXTERNAL_MEMORY is enabled. See the SPIRAM options for more details.

  • Internal IRAM (BLE_MESH_FREERTOS_STATIC_ALLOC_IRAM_8BIT)

    If enabled, BLE Mesh allocates dynamic memory from internal IRAM for FreeRTOS objects, i.e. mutex, queue. Note: IRAM region cannot be used as task stack.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEINIT

Support de-initialize BLE Mesh stack

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

If enabled, users can use the function esp_ble_mesh_deinit() to de-initialize the whole BLE Mesh stack.

Default value:
BLE Mesh and BLE coexistence support

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SUPPORT_BLE_ADV

Support sending normal BLE advertising packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh and BLE coexistence support

When selected, users can send normal BLE advertising packets with specific API.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_BLE_ADV_BUF_COUNT

Number of advertising buffers for BLE advertising packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh and BLE coexistence support > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SUPPORT_BLE_ADV

Number of advertising buffers for BLE packets available.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SUPPORT_BLE_SCAN

Support scanning normal BLE advertising packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh and BLE coexistence support

When selected, users can register a callback and receive normal BLE advertising packets in the application layer.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FAST_PROV

Enable BLE Mesh Fast Provisioning

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to allow BLE Mesh fast provisioning solution to be used. When there are multiple unprovisioned devices around, fast provisioning can greatly reduce the time consumption of the whole provisioning process. When this option is enabled, and after an unprovisioned device is provisioned into a node successfully, it can be changed to a temporary Provisioner.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_NODE

Support for BLE Mesh Node

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable the device to be provisioned into a node. This option should be enabled when an unprovisioned device is going to be provisioned into a node and communicate with other nodes in the BLE Mesh network.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

Support for BLE Mesh Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable the device to be a Provisioner. The option should be enabled when a device is going to act as a Provisioner and provision unprovisioned devices into the BLE Mesh network.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_WAIT_FOR_PROV_MAX_DEV_NUM

Maximum number of unprovisioned devices that can be added to device queue

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many unprovisioned devices can be added to device queue for provisioning. Users can use this option to define the size of the queue in the bottom layer which is used to store unprovisioned device information (e.g. Device UUID, address).

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MAX_PROV_NODES

Maximum number of devices that can be provisioned by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many devices can be provisioned by a Provisioner. This value indicates the maximum number of unprovisioned devices which can be provisioned by a Provisioner. For instance, if the value is 6, it means the Provisioner can provision up to 6 unprovisioned devices. Theoretically a Provisioner without the limitation of its memory can provision up to 32766 unprovisioned devices, here we limit the maximum number to 100 just to limit the memory used by a Provisioner. The bigger the value is, the more memory it will cost by a Provisioner to store the information of nodes.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PBA_SAME_TIME

Maximum number of PB-ADV running at the same time by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many devices can be provisioned at the same time using PB-ADV. For examples, if the value is 2, it means a Provisioner can provision two unprovisioned devices with PB-ADV at the same time.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PBG_SAME_TIME

Maximum number of PB-GATT running at the same time by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many devices can be provisioned at the same time using PB-GATT. For example, if the value is 2, it means a Provisioner can provision two unprovisioned devices with PB-GATT at the same time.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER_SUBNET_COUNT

Maximum number of mesh subnets that can be created by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many subnets per network a Provisioner can create. Indeed, this value decides the number of network keys which can be added by a Provisioner.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER_APP_KEY_COUNT

Maximum number of application keys that can be owned by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many application keys the Provisioner can have. Indeed, this value decides the number of the application keys which can be added by a Provisioner.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER_RECV_HB

Support receiving Heartbeat messages

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

When this option is enabled, Provisioner can call specific functions to enable or disable receiving Heartbeat messages and notify them to the application layer.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER_RECV_HB_FILTER_SIZE

Maximum number of filter entries for receiving Heartbeat messages

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER_RECV_HB

This option specifies how many heartbeat filter entries Provisioner supports. The heartbeat filter (acceptlist or rejectlist) entries are used to store a list of SRC and DST which can be used to decide if a heartbeat message will be processed and notified to the application layer by Provisioner. Note: The filter is an empty rejectlist by default.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROV

BLE Mesh Provisioning support

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to support BLE Mesh Provisioning functionality. For BLE Mesh, this option should be always enabled.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PB_ADV

Provisioning support using the advertising bearer (PB-ADV)

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to allow the device to be provisioned over the advertising bearer. This option should be enabled if PB-ADV is going to be used during provisioning procedure.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_UNPROVISIONED_BEACON_INTERVAL

Interval between two consecutive Unprovisioned Device Beacon

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PB_ADV

This option specifies the interval of sending two consecutive unprovisioned device beacon, users can use this option to change the frequency of sending unprovisioned device beacon. For example, if the value is 5, it means the unprovisioned device beacon will send every 5 seconds. When the option of BLE_MESH_FAST_PROV is selected, the value is better to be 3 seconds, or less.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PB_GATT

Provisioning support using GATT (PB-GATT)

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to allow the device to be provisioned over GATT. This option should be enabled if PB-GATT is going to be used during provisioning procedure.

# Virtual option enabled whenever any Proxy protocol is needed

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROXY

BLE Mesh Proxy protocol support

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to support BLE Mesh Proxy protocol used by PB-GATT and other proxy pdu transmission.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY_SERVER

BLE Mesh GATT Proxy Server

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option enables support for Mesh GATT Proxy Service, i.e. the ability to act as a proxy between a Mesh GATT Client and a Mesh network. This option should be enabled if a node is going to be a Proxy Server.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_NODE_ID_TIMEOUT

Node Identity advertising timeout

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY_SERVER

This option determines for how long the local node advertises using Node Identity. The given value is in seconds. The specification limits this to 60 seconds and lists it as the recommended value as well. So leaving the default value is the safest option. When an unprovisioned device is provisioned successfully and becomes a node, it will start to advertise using Node Identity during the time set by this option. And after that, Network ID will be advertised.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROXY_FILTER_SIZE

Maximum number of filter entries per Proxy Client

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY_SERVER

This option specifies how many Proxy Filter entries the local node supports. The entries of Proxy filter (whitelist or blacklist) are used to store a list of addresses which can be used to decide which messages will be forwarded to the Proxy Client by the Proxy Server.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY_CLIENT

BLE Mesh GATT Proxy Client

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option enables support for Mesh GATT Proxy Client. The Proxy Client can use the GATT bearer to send mesh messages to a node that supports the advertising bearer.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

Store BLE Mesh configuration persistently

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

When selected, the BLE Mesh stack will take care of storing/restoring the BLE Mesh configuration persistently in flash. If the device is a BLE Mesh node, when this option is enabled, the configuration of the device will be stored persistently, including unicast address, NetKey, AppKey, etc. And if the device is a BLE Mesh Provisioner, the information of the device will be stored persistently, including the information of provisioned nodes, NetKey, AppKey, etc.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_STORE_TIMEOUT

Delay (in seconds) before storing anything persistently

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

This value defines in seconds how soon any pending changes are actually written into persistent storage (flash) after a change occurs. The option allows nodes to delay a certain period of time to save proper information to flash. The default value is 0, which means information will be stored immediately once there are updates.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SEQ_STORE_RATE

How often the sequence number gets updated in storage

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

This value defines how often the local sequence number gets updated in persistent storage (i.e. flash). e.g. a value of 100 means that the sequence number will be stored to flash on every 100th increment. If the node sends messages very frequently a higher value makes more sense, whereas if the node sends infrequently a value as low as 0 (update storage for every increment) can make sense. When the stack gets initialized it will add sequence number to the last stored one, so that it starts off with a value that’s guaranteed to be larger than the last one used before power off.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RPL_STORE_TIMEOUT

Minimum frequency that the RPL gets updated in storage

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

This value defines in seconds how soon the RPL (Replay Protection List) gets written to persistent storage after a change occurs. If the node receives messages frequently, then a large value is recommended. If the node receives messages rarely, then the value can be as low as 0 (which means the RPL is written into the storage immediately). Note that if the node operates in a security-sensitive case, and there is a risk of sudden power-off, then a value of 0 is strongly recommended. Otherwise, a power loss before RPL being written into the storage may introduce message replay attacks and system security will be in a vulnerable state.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS_BACKWARD_COMPATIBILITY

A specific option for settings backward compatibility

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

This option is created to solve the issue of failure in recovering node information after mesh stack updates. In the old version mesh stack, there is no key of “mesh/role” in nvs. In the new version mesh stack, key of “mesh/role” is added in nvs, recovering node information needs to check “mesh/role” key in nvs and implements selective recovery of mesh node information. Therefore, there may be failure in recovering node information during node restarting after OTA.

The new version mesh stack adds the option of “mesh/role” because we have added the support of storing Provisioner information, while the old version only supports storing node information.

If users are updating their nodes from old version to new version, we recommend enabling this option, so that system could set the flag in advance before recovering node information and make sure the node information recovering could work as expected.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SPECIFIC_PARTITION

Use a specific NVS partition for BLE Mesh

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

When selected, the mesh stack will use a specified NVS partition instead of default NVS partition. Note that the specified partition must be registered with NVS using nvs_flash_init_partition() API, and the partition must exists in the csv file. When Provisioner needs to store a large amount of nodes’ information in the flash (e.g. more than 20), this option is recommended to be enabled.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PARTITION_NAME

Name of the NVS partition for BLE Mesh

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SPECIFIC_PARTITION

This value defines the name of the specified NVS partition used by the mesh stack.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_USE_MULTIPLE_NAMESPACE

Support using multiple NVS namespaces by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

When selected, Provisioner can use different NVS namespaces to store different instances of mesh information. For example, if in the first room, Provisioner uses NetKey A, AppKey A and provisions three devices, these information will be treated as mesh information instance A. When the Provisioner moves to the second room, it uses NetKey B, AppKey B and provisions two devices, then the information will be treated as mesh information instance B. Here instance A and instance B will be stored in different namespaces. With this option enabled, Provisioner needs to use specific functions to open the corresponding NVS namespace, restore the mesh information, release the mesh information or erase the mesh information.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MAX_NVS_NAMESPACE

Maximum number of NVS namespaces

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_USE_MULTIPLE_NAMESPACE

This option specifies the maximum NVS namespaces supported by Provisioner.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SUBNET_COUNT

Maximum number of mesh subnets per network

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies how many subnets a Mesh network can have at the same time. Indeed, this value decides the number of the network keys which can be owned by a node.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_APP_KEY_COUNT

Maximum number of application keys per network

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies how many application keys the device can store per network. Indeed, this value decides the number of the application keys which can be owned by a node.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MODEL_KEY_COUNT

Maximum number of application keys per model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies the maximum number of application keys to which each model can be bound.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MODEL_GROUP_COUNT

Maximum number of group address subscriptions per model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies the maximum number of addresses to which each model can be subscribed.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LABEL_COUNT

Maximum number of Label UUIDs used for Virtual Addresses

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies how many Label UUIDs can be stored. Indeed, this value decides the number of the Virtual Addresses can be supported by a node.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_CRPL

Maximum capacity of the replay protection list

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies the maximum capacity of the replay protection list. It is similar to Network message cache size, but has a different purpose. The replay protection list is used to prevent a node from replay attack, which will store the source address and sequence number of the received mesh messages. For Provisioner, the replay protection list size should not be smaller than the maximum number of nodes whose information can be stored. And the element number of each node should also be taken into consideration. For example, if Provisioner can provision up to 20 nodes and each node contains two elements, then the replay protection list size of Provisioner should be at least 40.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_NOT_RELAY_REPLAY_MSG

Not relay replayed messages in a mesh network

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

There may be many expired messages in a complex mesh network that would be considered replayed messages. Enable this option will refuse to relay such messages, which could help to reduce invalid packets in the mesh network. However, it should be noted that enabling this option may result in packet loss in certain environments. Therefore, users need to decide whether to enable this option according to the actual usage situation.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MSG_CACHE_SIZE

Network message cache size

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Number of messages that are cached for the network. This helps prevent unnecessary decryption operations and unnecessary relays. This option is similar to Replay protection list, but has a different purpose. A node is not required to cache the entire Network PDU and may cache only part of it for tracking, such as values for SRC/SEQ or others.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_ADV_BUF_COUNT

Number of advertising buffers

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Number of advertising buffers available. The transport layer reserves ADV_BUF_COUNT - 3 buffers for outgoing segments. The maximum outgoing SDU size is 12 times this value (out of which 4 or 8 bytes are used for the Transport Layer MIC). For example, 5 segments means the maximum SDU size is 60 bytes, which leaves 56 bytes for application layer data using a 4-byte MIC, or 52 bytes using an 8-byte MIC.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_IVU_DIVIDER

Divider for IV Update state refresh timer

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

When the IV Update state enters Normal operation or IV Update in Progress, we need to keep track of how many hours has passed in the state, since the specification requires us to remain in the state at least for 96 hours (Update in Progress has an additional upper limit of 144 hours).

In order to fulfill the above requirement, even if the node might be powered off once in a while, we need to store persistently how many hours the node has been in the state. This doesn’t necessarily need to happen every hour (thanks to the flexible duration range). The exact cadence will depend a lot on the ways that the node will be used and what kind of power source it has.

Since there is no single optimal answer, this configuration option allows specifying a divider, i.e. how many intervals the 96 hour minimum gets split into. After each interval the duration that the node has been in the current state gets stored to flash. E.g. the default value of 4 means that the state is saved every 24 hours (96 / 4).

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_IVU_RECOVERY_IVI

Recovery the IV index when the latest whole IV update procedure is missed

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

According to Section 3.10.5 of Mesh Specification v1.0.1. If a node in Normal Operation receives a Secure Network beacon with an IV index equal to the last known IV index+1 and the IV Update Flag set to 0, the node may update its IV without going to the IV Update in Progress state, or it may initiate an IV Index Recovery procedure (Section 3.10.6), or it may ignore the Secure Network beacon. The node makes the choice depending on the time since last IV update and the likelihood that the node has missed the Secure Network beacons with the IV update Flag. When the above situation is encountered, this option can be used to decide whether to perform the IV index recovery procedure.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TX_SEG_MSG_COUNT

Maximum number of simultaneous outgoing segmented messages

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Maximum number of simultaneous outgoing multi-segment and/or reliable messages. The default value is 1, which means the device can only send one segmented message at a time. And if another segmented message is going to be sent, it should wait for the completion of the previous one. If users are going to send multiple segmented messages at the same time, this value should be configured properly.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RX_SEG_MSG_COUNT

Maximum number of simultaneous incoming segmented messages

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Maximum number of simultaneous incoming multi-segment and/or reliable messages. The default value is 1, which means the device can only receive one segmented message at a time. And if another segmented message is going to be received, it should wait for the completion of the previous one. If users are going to receive multiple segmented messages at the same time, this value should be configured properly.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RX_SDU_MAX

Maximum incoming Upper Transport Access PDU length

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Maximum incoming Upper Transport Access PDU length. Leave this to the default value, unless you really need to optimize memory usage.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TX_SEG_MAX

Maximum number of segments in outgoing messages

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Maximum number of segments supported for outgoing messages. This value should typically be fine-tuned based on what models the local node supports, i.e. what’s the largest message payload that the node needs to be able to send. This value affects memory and call stack consumption, which is why the default is lower than the maximum that the specification would allow (32 segments).

The maximum outgoing SDU size is 12 times this number (out of which 4 or 8 bytes is used for the Transport Layer MIC). For example, 5 segments means the maximum SDU size is 60 bytes, which leaves 56 bytes for application layer data using a 4-byte MIC and 52 bytes using an 8-byte MIC.

Be sure to specify a sufficient number of advertising buffers when setting this option to a higher value. There must be at least three more advertising buffers (BLE_MESH_ADV_BUF_COUNT) as there are outgoing segments.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY

Relay support

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Support for acting as a Mesh Relay Node. Enabling this option will allow a node to support the Relay feature, and the Relay feature can still be enabled or disabled by proper configuration messages. Disabling this option will let a node not support the Relay feature.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY_ADV_BUF

Use separate advertising buffers for relay packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY

When selected, self-send packets will be put in a high-priority queue and relay packets will be put in a low-priority queue.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY_ADV_BUF_COUNT

Number of advertising buffers for relay packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY_ADV_BUF

Number of advertising buffers for relay packets available.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Support for Low Power features

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to operate as a Low Power Node. If low power consumption is required by a node, this option should be enabled. And once the node enters the mesh network, it will try to find a Friend node and establish a friendship.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_ESTABLISHMENT

Perform Friendship establishment using low power

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Perform the Friendship establishment using low power with the help of a reduced scan duty cycle. The downside of this is that the node may miss out on messages intended for it until it has successfully set up Friendship with a Friend node. When this option is enabled, the node will stop scanning for a period of time after a Friend Request or Friend Poll is sent, so as to reduce more power consumption.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_AUTO

Automatically start looking for Friend nodes once provisioned

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Once provisioned, automatically enable LPN functionality and start looking for Friend nodes. If this option is disabled LPN mode needs to be manually enabled by calling bt_mesh_lpn_set(true). When an unprovisioned device is provisioned successfully and becomes a node, enabling this option will trigger the node starts to send Friend Request at a certain period until it finds a proper Friend node.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_AUTO_TIMEOUT

Time from last received message before going to LPN mode

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_AUTO

Time in seconds from the last received message, that the node waits out before starting to look for Friend nodes.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_RETRY_TIMEOUT

Retry timeout for Friend requests

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Time in seconds between Friend Requests, if a previous Friend Request did not yield any acceptable Friend Offers.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_RSSI_FACTOR

RSSIFactor, used in Friend Offer Delay calculation

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

The contribution of the RSSI, measured by the Friend node, used in Friend Offer Delay calculations. 0 = 1, 1 = 1.5, 2 = 2, 3 = 2.5. RSSIFactor, one of the parameters carried by Friend Request sent by Low Power node, which is used to calculate the Friend Offer Delay.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_RECV_WIN_FACTOR

ReceiveWindowFactor, used in Friend Offer Delay calculation

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

The contribution of the supported Receive Window used in Friend Offer Delay calculations. 0 = 1, 1 = 1.5, 2 = 2, 3 = 2.5. ReceiveWindowFactor, one of the parameters carried by Friend Request sent by Low Power node, which is used to calculate the Friend Offer Delay.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_MIN_QUEUE_SIZE

Minimum size of the acceptable friend queue (MinQueueSizeLog)

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

The MinQueueSizeLog field is defined as log_2(N), where N is the minimum number of maximum size Lower Transport PDUs that the Friend node can store in its Friend Queue. As an example, MinQueueSizeLog value 1 gives N = 2, and value 7 gives N = 128.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_RECV_DELAY

Receive delay requested by the local node

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

The ReceiveDelay is the time between the Low Power node sending a request and listening for a response. This delay allows the Friend node time to prepare the response. The value is in units of milliseconds.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_POLL_TIMEOUT

The value of the PollTimeout timer

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

PollTimeout timer is used to measure time between two consecutive requests sent by a Low Power node. If no requests are received the Friend node before the PollTimeout timer expires, then the friendship is considered terminated. The value is in units of 100 milliseconds, so e.g. a value of 300 means 30 seconds. The smaller the value, the faster the Low Power node tries to get messages from corresponding Friend node and vice versa.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_INIT_POLL_TIMEOUT

The starting value of the PollTimeout timer

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

The initial value of the PollTimeout timer when Friendship is to be established for the first time. After this, the timeout gradually grows toward the actual PollTimeout, doubling in value for each iteration. The value is in units of 100 milliseconds, so e.g. a value of 300 means 30 seconds.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_SCAN_LATENCY

Latency for enabling scanning

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Latency (in milliseconds) is the time it takes to enable scanning. In practice, it means how much time in advance of the Receive Window, the request to enable scanning is made.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_GROUPS

Number of groups the LPN can subscribe to

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Maximum number of groups to which the LPN can subscribe.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_SUB_ALL_NODES_ADDR

Automatically subscribe all nodes address

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Automatically subscribe all nodes address when friendship established.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Support for Friend feature

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to be able to act as a Friend Node.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND_RECV_WIN

Friend Receive Window

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Receive Window in milliseconds supported by the Friend node.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND_QUEUE_SIZE

Minimum number of buffers supported per Friend Queue

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Minimum number of buffers available to be stored for each local Friend Queue. This option decides the size of each buffer which can be used by a Friend node to store messages for each Low Power node.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND_SUB_LIST_SIZE

Friend Subscription List Size

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Size of the Subscription List that can be supported by a Friend node for a Low Power node. And Low Power node can send Friend Subscription List Add or Friend Subscription List Remove messages to the Friend node to add or remove subscription addresses.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND_LPN_COUNT

Number of supported LPN nodes

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Number of Low Power Nodes with which a Friend can have Friendship simultaneously. A Friend node can have friendship with multiple Low Power nodes at the same time, while a Low Power node can only establish friendship with only one Friend node at the same time.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND_SEG_RX

Number of incomplete segment lists per LPN

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Number of incomplete segment lists tracked for each Friends’ LPN. In other words, this determines from how many elements can segmented messages destined for the Friend queue be received simultaneously.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_NO_LOG

Disable BLE Mesh debug logs (minimize bin size)

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Select this to save the BLE Mesh related rodata code size. Enabling this option will disable the output of BLE Mesh debug log.

Default value:
BLE Mesh STACK DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_STACK_TRACE_LEVEL

BLE_MESH_STACK

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh STACK DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BLE Mesh trace level for BLE Mesh stack.

Available options:

  • NONE (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • INFO (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_INFO)

  • DEBUG (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

BLE Mesh NET BUF DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL

BLE_MESH_NET_BUF

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh NET BUF DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BLE Mesh trace level for BLE Mesh net buffer.

Available options:

  • NONE (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • INFO (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_INFO)

  • DEBUG (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_CLIENT_MSG_TIMEOUT

Timeout(ms) for client message response

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Timeout value used by the node to get response of the acknowledged message which is sent by the client model. This value indicates the maximum time that a client model waits for the response of the sent acknowledged messages. If a client model uses 0 as the timeout value when sending acknowledged messages, then the default value will be used which is four seconds.

Range:
Default value:
Support for BLE Mesh Foundation models

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_CFG_CLI

Configuration Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Foundation models

Enable support for Configuration Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_HEALTH_CLI

Health Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Foundation models

Enable support for Health Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_HEALTH_SRV

Health Server model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Foundation models

Enable support for Health Server model.

Default value:
Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_ONOFF_CLI

Generic OnOff Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic OnOff Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_LEVEL_CLI

Generic Level Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Level Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_DEF_TRANS_TIME_CLI

Generic Default Transition Time Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Default Transition Time Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_POWER_ONOFF_CLI

Generic Power OnOff Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Power OnOff Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_POWER_LEVEL_CLI

Generic Power Level Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Power Level Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_BATTERY_CLI

Generic Battery Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Battery Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_LOCATION_CLI

Generic Location Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Location Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_PROPERTY_CLI

Generic Property Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Property Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SENSOR_CLI

Sensor Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Sensor Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TIME_CLI

Time Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Time Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SCENE_CLI

Scene Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Scene Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SCHEDULER_CLI

Scheduler Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Scheduler Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHT_LIGHTNESS_CLI

Light Lightness Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Light Lightness Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHT_CTL_CLI

Light CTL Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Light CTL Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHT_HSL_CLI

Light HSL Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Light HSL Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHT_XYL_CLI

Light XYL Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Light XYL Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHT_LC_CLI

Light LC Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Light LC Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_SERVER

Generic server models

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic server models.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SENSOR_SERVER

Sensor server models

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Sensor server models.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TIME_SCENE_SERVER

Time and Scenes server models

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Time and Scenes server models.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHTING_SERVER

Lighting server models

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Lighting server models.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_IV_UPDATE_TEST

Test the IV Update Procedure

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option removes the 96 hour limit of the IV Update Procedure and lets the state to be changed at any time. If IV Update test mode is going to be used, this option should be enabled.

Default value:
BLE Mesh specific test option

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SELF_TEST

Perform BLE Mesh self-tests

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option

This option adds extra self-tests which are run every time BLE Mesh networking is initialized.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_BQB_TEST

Enable BLE Mesh specific internal test

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option

This option is used to enable some internal functions for auto-pts test.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TEST_AUTO_ENTER_NETWORK

Unprovisioned device enters mesh network automatically

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option

With this option enabled, an unprovisioned device can automatically enters mesh network using a specific test function without the pro- visioning procedure. And on the Provisioner side, a test function needs to be invoked to add the node information into the mesh stack.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TEST_USE_WHITE_LIST

Use white list to filter mesh advertising packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option

With this option enabled, users can use white list to filter mesh advertising packets while scanning.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SHELL

Enable BLE Mesh shell

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option

Activate shell module that provides BLE Mesh commands to the console.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable BLE Mesh debug logs

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option

Enable debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_NET

Network layer debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Network layer debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_TRANS

Transport layer debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Transport layer debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_BEACON

Beacon debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Beacon-related debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_CRYPTO

Crypto debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable cryptographic debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_PROV

Provisioning debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Provisioning debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_ACCESS

Access layer debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Access layer debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_MODEL

Foundation model debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Foundation Models debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_ADV

Advertising debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable advertising debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_LOW_POWER

Low Power debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Low Power debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_FRIEND

Friend debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Friend debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_PROXY

Proxy debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Proxy protocol debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_EXPERIMENTAL

Make BLE Mesh experimental features visible

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Make BLE Mesh Experimental features visible. Experimental features list: - CONFIG_BLE_MESH_NOT_RELAY_REPLAY_MSG

Default value:

Driver Configurations

Contains:

Legacy ADC Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_ADC_DISABLE_DAC

Disable DAC when ADC2 is used on GPIO 25 and 26

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Legacy ADC Configuration

If this is set, the ADC2 driver will disable the output of the DAC corresponding to the specified channel. This is the default value.

For testing, disable this option so that we can measure the output of DAC by internal ADC.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ADC_SUPPRESS_DEPRECATE_WARN

Suppress legacy driver deprecated warning

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Legacy ADC Configuration

Wether to suppress the deprecation warnings when using legacy adc driver (driver/adc.h). If you want to continue using the legacy driver, and don’t want to see related deprecation warnings, you can enable this option.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Legacy ADC Calibration Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_ADC_CAL_EFUSE_TP_ENABLE

Use Two Point Values

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Legacy ADC Configuration > Legacy ADC Calibration Configuration

Some ESP32s have Two Point calibration values burned into eFuse BLOCK3. This option will allow the ADC calibration component to characterize the ADC-Voltage curve using Two Point values if they are available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ADC_CAL_EFUSE_VREF_ENABLE

Use eFuse Vref

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Legacy ADC Configuration > Legacy ADC Calibration Configuration

Some ESP32s have Vref burned into eFuse BLOCK0. This option will allow the ADC calibration component to characterize the ADC-Voltage curve using eFuse Vref if it is available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ADC_CAL_LUT_ENABLE

Use Lookup Tables

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Legacy ADC Configuration > Legacy ADC Calibration Configuration

This option will allow the ADC calibration component to use Lookup Tables to correct for non-linear behavior in 11db attenuation. Other attenuations do not exhibit non-linear behavior hence will not be affected by this option.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ADC_CALI_SUPPRESS_DEPRECATE_WARN

Suppress legacy driver deprecated warning

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Legacy ADC Configuration > Legacy ADC Calibration Configuration

Wether to suppress the deprecation warnings when using legacy adc calibration driver (esp_adc_cal.h). If you want to continue using the legacy driver, and don’t want to see related deprecation warnings, you can enable this option.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

SPI Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_SPI_MASTER_IN_IRAM

Place transmitting functions of SPI master into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > SPI Configuration

Normally only the ISR of SPI master is placed in the IRAM, so that it can work without the flash when interrupt is triggered. For other functions, there’s some possibility that the flash cache miss when running inside and out of SPI functions, which may increase the interval of SPI transactions. Enable this to put queue\_trans, get\_trans\_result and transmit functions into the IRAM to avoid possible cache miss.

During unit test, this is enabled to measure the ideal case of api.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_MASTER_ISR_IN_IRAM

Place SPI master ISR function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > SPI Configuration

Place the SPI master ISR in to IRAM to avoid possible cache miss.

Also you can forbid the ISR being disabled during flash writing access, by add ESP_INTR_FLAG_IRAM when initializing the driver.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_SLAVE_IN_IRAM

Place transmitting functions of SPI slave into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > SPI Configuration

Normally only the ISR of SPI slave is placed in the IRAM, so that it can work without the flash when interrupt is triggered. For other functions, there’s some possibility that the flash cache miss when running inside and out of SPI functions, which may increase the interval of SPI transactions. Enable this to put queue\_trans, get\_trans\_result and transmit functions into the IRAM to avoid possible cache miss.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_SLAVE_ISR_IN_IRAM

Place SPI slave ISR function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > SPI Configuration

Place the SPI slave ISR in to IRAM to avoid possible cache miss.

Also you can forbid the ISR being disabled during flash writing access, by add ESP_INTR_FLAG_IRAM when initializing the driver.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

TWAI Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_TWAI_ISR_IN_IRAM

Place TWAI ISR function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > TWAI Configuration

Place the TWAI ISR in to IRAM. This will allow the ISR to avoid cache misses, and also be able to run whilst the cache is disabled (such as when writing to SPI Flash). Note that if this option is enabled: - Users should also set the ESP_INTR_FLAG_IRAM in the driver configuration structure when installing the driver (see docs for specifics). - Alert logging (i.e., setting of the TWAI_ALERT_AND_LOG flag) will have no effect.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_TWAI_ERRATA_FIX_BUS_OFF_REC

Add SW workaround for REC change during bus-off

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > TWAI Configuration

When the bus-off condition is reached, the REC should be reset to 0 and frozen (via LOM) by the driver’s ISR. However on the ESP32, there is an edge case where the REC will increase before the driver’s ISR can respond in time (e.g., due to the rapid occurrence of bus errors), thus causing the REC to be non-zero after bus-off. A non-zero REC can prevent bus-off recovery as the bus-off recovery condition is that both TEC and REC become 0. Enabling this option will add a workaround in the driver to forcibly reset REC to zero on reaching bus-off.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_TWAI_ERRATA_FIX_TX_INTR_LOST

Add SW workaround for TX interrupt lost errata

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > TWAI Configuration

On the ESP32, when a transmit interrupt occurs, and interrupt register is read on the same APB clock cycle, the transmit interrupt could be lost. Enabling this option will add a workaround that checks the transmit buffer status bit to recover any lost transmit interrupt.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_TWAI_ERRATA_FIX_RX_FRAME_INVALID

Add SW workaround for invalid RX frame errata

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > TWAI Configuration

On the ESP32, when receiving a data or remote frame, if a bus error occurs in the data or CRC field, the data of the next received frame could be invalid. Enabling this option will add a workaround that will reset the peripheral on detection of this errata condition. Note that if a frame is transmitted on the bus whilst the reset is ongoing, the message will not be receive by the peripheral sent on the bus during the reset, the message will be lost.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_TWAI_ERRATA_FIX_RX_FIFO_CORRUPT

Add SW workaround for RX FIFO corruption errata

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > TWAI Configuration

On the ESP32, when the RX FIFO overruns and the RX message counter maxes out at 64 messages, the entire RX FIFO is no longer recoverable. Enabling this option will add a workaround that resets the peripheral on detection of this errata condition. Note that if a frame is being sent on the bus during the reset bus during the reset, the message will be lost.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_TWAI_ERRATA_FIX_LISTEN_ONLY_DOM

Add SW workaround for listen only transmits dominant bit errata

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > TWAI Configuration

When in the listen only mode, the TWAI controller must not influence the TWAI bus (i.e., must not send any dominant bits). However, while in listen only mode on the ESP32/ESP32-S2/ESP32-S3/ESP32-C3, the TWAI controller will still transmit dominant bits when it detects an error (i.e., as part of an active error frame). Enabling this option will add a workaround that forces the TWAI controller into an error passive state on initialization, thus preventing any dominant bits from being sent.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Temperature sensor Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_TEMP_SENSOR_SUPPRESS_DEPRECATE_WARN

Suppress legacy driver deprecated warning

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Temperature sensor Configuration

Wether to suppress the deprecation warnings when using legacy temperature sensor driver (driver/temp_sensor.h). If you want to continue using the legacy driver, and don’t want to see related deprecation warnings, you can enable this option.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SOC_TEMP_SENSOR_SUPPORTED

CONFIG_TEMP_SENSOR_ENABLE_DEBUG_LOG

Enable debug log

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Temperature sensor Configuration

Wether to enable the debug log message for temperature sensor driver. Note that, this option only controls the temperature sensor driver log, won’t affect other drivers.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SOC_TEMP_SENSOR_SUPPORTED

UART Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_UART_ISR_IN_IRAM

Place UART ISR function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > UART Configuration

If this option is not selected, UART interrupt will be disabled for a long time and may cause data lost when doing spi flash operation.

Default value:
GPIO Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_GPIO_ESP32_SUPPORT_SWITCH_SLP_PULL

Support light sleep GPIO pullup/pulldown configuration for ESP32

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > GPIO Configuration

This option is intended to fix the bug that ESP32 is not able to switch to configured pullup/pulldown mode in sleep. If this option is selected, chip will automatically emulate the behaviour of switching, and about 450B of source codes would be placed into IRAM.

CONFIG_GPIO_CTRL_FUNC_IN_IRAM

Place GPIO control functions into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > GPIO Configuration

Place GPIO control functions (like intr_disable/set_level) into IRAM, so that these functions can be IRAM-safe and able to be called in the other IRAM interrupt context.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Sigma Delta Modulator Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_SDM_CTRL_FUNC_IN_IRAM

Place SDM control functions into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Sigma Delta Modulator Configuration

Place SDM control functions (like set_duty) into IRAM, so that these functions can be IRAM-safe and able to be called in the other IRAM interrupt context. Enabling this option can improve driver performance as well.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SDM_SUPPRESS_DEPRECATE_WARN

Suppress legacy driver deprecated warning

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Sigma Delta Modulator Configuration

Wether to suppress the deprecation warnings when using legacy sigma delta driver. If you want to continue using the legacy driver, and don’t want to see related deprecation warnings, you can enable this option.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SDM_ENABLE_DEBUG_LOG

Enable debug log

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > Sigma Delta Modulator Configuration

Wether to enable the debug log message for SDM driver. Note that, this option only controls the SDM driver log, won’t affect other drivers.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

GPTimer Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_GPTIMER_CTRL_FUNC_IN_IRAM

Place GPTimer control functions into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > GPTimer Configuration

Place GPTimer control functions (like start/stop) into IRAM, so that these functions can be IRAM-safe and able to be called in the other IRAM interrupt context. Enabling this option can improve driver performance as well.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_GPTIMER_ISR_IRAM_SAFE

GPTimer ISR IRAM-Safe

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > GPTimer Configuration

Ensure the GPTimer interrupt is IRAM-Safe by allowing the interrupt handler to be executable when the cache is disabled (e.g. SPI Flash write).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_GPTIMER_SUPPRESS_DEPRECATE_WARN

Suppress legacy driver deprecated warning

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > GPTimer Configuration

Wether to suppress the deprecation warnings when using legacy timer group driver (driver/timer.h). If you want to continue using the legacy driver, and don’t want to see related deprecation warnings, you can enable this option.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_GPTIMER_ENABLE_DEBUG_LOG

Enable debug log

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > GPTimer Configuration

Wether to enable the debug log message for GPTimer driver. Note that, this option only controls the GPTimer driver log, won’t affect other drivers.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

PCNT Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_PCNT_CTRL_FUNC_IN_IRAM

Place PCNT control functions into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > PCNT Configuration

Place PCNT control functions (like start/stop) into IRAM, so that these functions can be IRAM-safe and able to be called in the other IRAM interrupt context. Enabling this option can improve driver performance as well.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_PCNT_ISR_IRAM_SAFE

PCNT ISR IRAM-Safe

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > PCNT Configuration

Ensure the PCNT interrupt is IRAM-Safe by allowing the interrupt handler to be executable when the cache is disabled (e.g. SPI Flash write).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_PCNT_SUPPRESS_DEPRECATE_WARN

Suppress legacy driver deprecated warning

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > PCNT Configuration

Wether to suppress the deprecation warnings when using legacy PCNT driver (driver/pcnt.h). If you want to continue using the legacy driver, and don’t want to see related deprecation warnings, you can enable this option.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_PCNT_ENABLE_DEBUG_LOG

Enable debug log

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > PCNT Configuration

Wether to enable the debug log message for PCNT driver. Note that, this option only controls the PCNT driver log, won’t affect other drivers.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

RMT Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_RMT_ISR_IRAM_SAFE

RMT ISR IRAM-Safe

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > RMT Configuration

Ensure the RMT interrupt is IRAM-Safe by allowing the interrupt handler to be executable when the cache is disabled (e.g. SPI Flash write).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_RMT_RECV_FUNC_IN_IRAM

Place RMT receive function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > RMT Configuration

Place RMT receive function into IRAM, so that the receive function can be IRAM-safe and able to be called when the flash cache is disabled. Enabling this option can improve driver performance as well.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_RMT_SUPPRESS_DEPRECATE_WARN

Suppress legacy driver deprecated warning

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > RMT Configuration

Wether to suppress the deprecation warnings when using legacy rmt driver (driver/rmt.h). If you want to continue using the legacy driver, and don’t want to see related deprecation warnings, you can enable this option.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_RMT_ENABLE_DEBUG_LOG

Enable debug log

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > RMT Configuration

Wether to enable the debug log message for RMT driver. Note that, this option only controls the RMT driver log, won’t affect other drivers.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

MCPWM Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_MCPWM_ISR_IRAM_SAFE

Place MCPWM ISR function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > MCPWM Configuration

This will ensure the MCPWM interrupt handle is IRAM-Safe, allow to avoid flash cache misses, and also be able to run whilst the cache is disabled. (e.g. SPI Flash write)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MCPWM_CTRL_FUNC_IN_IRAM

Place MCPWM control functions into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > MCPWM Configuration

Place MCPWM control functions (like set_compare_value) into IRAM, so that these functions can be IRAM-safe and able to be called in the other IRAM interrupt context. Enabling this option can improve driver performance as well.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MCPWM_SUPPRESS_DEPRECATE_WARN

Suppress legacy driver deprecated warning

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > MCPWM Configuration

Wether to suppress the deprecation warnings when using legacy MCPWM driver (driver/mcpwm.h). If you want to continue using the legacy driver, and don’t want to see related deprecation warnings, you can enable this option.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MCPWM_ENABLE_DEBUG_LOG

Enable debug log

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > MCPWM Configuration

Wether to enable the debug log message for MCPWM driver. Note that, this option only controls the MCPWM driver log, won’t affect other drivers.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

I2S Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_I2S_ISR_IRAM_SAFE

I2S ISR IRAM-Safe

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > I2S Configuration

Ensure the I2S interrupt is IRAM-Safe by allowing the interrupt handler to be executable when the cache is disabled (e.g. SPI Flash write).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_I2S_SUPPRESS_DEPRECATE_WARN

Suppress leagcy driver deprecated warning

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > I2S Configuration

Enable this option will suppress the deprecation warnings of using APIs in legacy I2S driver.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_I2S_ENABLE_DEBUG_LOG

Enable I2S debug log

Found in: Component config > Driver Configurations > I2S Configuration

Wether to enable the debug log message for I2S driver. Note that, this option only controls the I2S driver log, will not affect other drivers.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

eFuse Bit Manager

Contains:

CONFIG_EFUSE_CUSTOM_TABLE

Use custom eFuse table

Found in: Component config > eFuse Bit Manager

Allows to generate a structure for eFuse from the CSV file.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_EFUSE_CUSTOM_TABLE_FILENAME

Custom eFuse CSV file

Found in: Component config > eFuse Bit Manager > CONFIG_EFUSE_CUSTOM_TABLE

Name of the custom eFuse CSV filename. This path is evaluated relative to the project root directory.

Default value:
CONFIG_EFUSE_VIRTUAL

Simulate eFuse operations in RAM

Found in: Component config > eFuse Bit Manager

If “n” - No virtual mode. All eFuse operations are real and use eFuse registers. If “y” - The virtual mode is enabled and all eFuse operations (read and write) are redirected to RAM instead of eFuse registers, all permanent changes (via eFuse) are disabled. Log output will state changes that would be applied, but they will not be.

During startup, the eFuses are copied into RAM. This mode is useful for fast tests.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_EFUSE_VIRTUAL_KEEP_IN_FLASH

Keep eFuses in flash

Found in: Component config > eFuse Bit Manager > CONFIG_EFUSE_VIRTUAL

In addition to the “Simulate eFuse operations in RAM” option, this option just adds a feature to keep eFuses after reboots in flash memory. To use this mode the partition_table should have the efuse partition. partition.csv: “efuse_em, data, efuse, , 0x2000,”

During startup, the eFuses are copied from flash or, in case if flash is empty, from real eFuse to RAM and then update flash. This mode is useful when need to keep changes after reboot (testing secure_boot and flash_encryption).

CONFIG_EFUSE_CODE_SCHEME_SELECTOR

Coding Scheme Compatibility

Found in: Component config > eFuse Bit Manager

Selector eFuse code scheme.

Available options:

  • None Only (EFUSE_CODE_SCHEME_COMPAT_NONE)

  • 3/4 and None (EFUSE_CODE_SCHEME_COMPAT_3_4)

  • Repeat, 3/4 and None (common table does not support it) (EFUSE_CODE_SCHEME_COMPAT_REPEAT)

ESP-TLS

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_LIBRARY_CHOOSE

Choose SSL/TLS library for ESP-TLS (See help for more Info)

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

The ESP-TLS APIs support multiple backend TLS libraries. Currently mbedTLS and WolfSSL are supported. Different TLS libraries may support different features and have different resource usage. Consult the ESP-TLS documentation in ESP-IDF Programming guide for more details.

Available options:

  • mbedTLS (ESP_TLS_USING_MBEDTLS)

  • wolfSSL (License info in wolfSSL directory README) (ESP_TLS_USING_WOLFSSL)

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_USE_SECURE_ELEMENT

Use Secure Element (ATECC608A) with ESP-TLS

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enable use of Secure Element for ESP-TLS, this enables internal support for ATECC608A peripheral on ESPWROOM32SE, which can be used for TLS connection.

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_USE_DS_PERIPHERAL

Use Digital Signature (DS) Peripheral with ESP-TLS

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enable use of the Digital Signature Peripheral for ESP-TLS.The DS peripheral can only be used when it is appropriately configured for TLS. Consult the ESP-TLS documentation in ESP-IDF Programming Guide for more details.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if ESP_TLS_USING_MBEDTLS && SOC_DIG_SIGN_SUPPORTED

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_CLIENT_SESSION_TICKETS

Enable client session tickets

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enable session ticket support as specified in RFC5077.

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER

Enable ESP-TLS Server

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enable support for creating server side SSL/TLS session, available for mbedTLS as well as wolfSSL TLS library.

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER_SESSION_TICKETS

Enable server session tickets

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS > CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER

Enable session ticket support as specified in RFC5077

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER_SESSION_TICKET_TIMEOUT

Server session ticket timeout in seconds

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS > CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER > CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER_SESSION_TICKETS

Sets the session ticket timeout used in the tls server.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER_CERT_SELECT_HOOK

Certificate selection hook

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS > CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER

Ability to configure and use a certificate selection callback during server handshake, to select a certificate to present to the client based on the TLS extensions supplied in the client hello (alpn, sni, etc).

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER_MIN_AUTH_MODE_OPTIONAL

ESP-TLS Server: Set minimum Certificate Verification mode to Optional

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS > CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER

When this option is enabled, the peer (here, the client) certificate is checked by the server, however the handshake continues even if verification failed. By default, the peer certificate is not checked and ignored by the server.

mbedtls_ssl_get_verify_result() can be called after the handshake is complete to retrieve status of verification.

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_PSK_VERIFICATION

Enable PSK verification

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enable support for pre shared key ciphers, supported for both mbedTLS as well as wolfSSL TLS library.

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_INSECURE

Allow potentially insecure options

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

You can enable some potentially insecure options. These options should only be used for testing pusposes. Only enable these options if you are very sure.

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SKIP_SERVER_CERT_VERIFY

Skip server certificate verification by default (WARNING: ONLY FOR TESTING PURPOSE, READ HELP)

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS > CONFIG_ESP_TLS_INSECURE

After enabling this option the esp-tls client will skip the server certificate verification by default. Note that this option will only modify the default behaviour of esp-tls client regarding server cert verification. The default behaviour should only be applicable when no other option regarding the server cert verification is opted in the esp-tls config (e.g. crt_bundle_attach, use_global_ca_store etc.). WARNING : Enabling this option comes with a potential risk of establishing a TLS connection with a server which has a fake identity, provided that the server certificate is not provided either through API or other mechanism like ca_store etc.

CONFIG_ESP_WOLFSSL_SMALL_CERT_VERIFY

Enable SMALL_CERT_VERIFY

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enables server verification with Intermediate CA cert, does not authenticate full chain of trust upto the root CA cert (After Enabling this option client only needs to have Intermediate CA certificate of the server to authenticate server, root CA cert is not necessary).

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if ESP_TLS_USING_WOLFSSL

CONFIG_ESP_DEBUG_WOLFSSL

Enable debug logs for wolfSSL

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enable detailed debug prints for wolfSSL SSL library.

ADC and ADC Calibration

Contains:

CONFIG_ADC_ONESHOT_CTRL_FUNC_IN_IRAM

Place ISR version ADC oneshot mode read function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > ADC and ADC Calibration

Place ISR version ADC oneshot mode read function into IRAM.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ADC_CONTINUOUS_ISR_IRAM_SAFE

ADC continuous mode driver ISR IRAM-Safe

Found in: Component config > ADC and ADC Calibration

Ensure the ADC continuous mode ISR is IRAM-Safe. When enabled, the ISR handler will be available when the cache is disabled.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

ADC Calibration Configurations

Contains:

CONFIG_ADC_CALI_EFUSE_TP_ENABLE

Use Two Point Values

Found in: Component config > ADC and ADC Calibration > ADC Calibration Configurations

Some ESP32s have Two Point calibration values burned into eFuse BLOCK3. This option will allow the ADC calibration component to characterize the ADC-Voltage curve using Two Point values if they are available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ADC_CALI_EFUSE_VREF_ENABLE

Use eFuse Vref

Found in: Component config > ADC and ADC Calibration > ADC Calibration Configurations

Some ESP32s have Vref burned into eFuse BLOCK0. This option will allow the ADC calibration component to characterize the ADC-Voltage curve using eFuse Vref if it is available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ADC_CALI_LUT_ENABLE

Use Lookup Tables

Found in: Component config > ADC and ADC Calibration > ADC Calibration Configurations

This option will allow the ADC calibration component to use Lookup Tables to correct for non-linear behavior in 11db attenuation. Other attenuations do not exhibit non-linear behavior hence will not be affected by this option.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ADC_DISABLE_DAC_OUTPUT

Disable DAC when ADC2 is in use

Found in: Component config > ADC and ADC Calibration

By default, this is set. The ADC oneshot driver will disable the output of the corresponding DAC channels: ESP32: IO25 and IO26 ESP32S2: IO17 and IO18

Disable this option so as to measure the output of DAC by internal ADC, for test usage.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Ethernet

Contains:

CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Support ESP32 internal EMAC controller

Found in: Component config > Ethernet

ESP32 integrates a 10/100M Ethernet MAC controller.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_ETH_PHY_INTERFACE

PHY interface

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Select the communication interface between MAC and PHY chip.

Available options:

  • Reduced Media Independent Interface (RMII) (ETH_PHY_INTERFACE_RMII)

CONFIG_ETH_RMII_CLK_MODE

RMII clock mode

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Select external or internal RMII clock.

Available options:

  • Input RMII clock from external (ETH_RMII_CLK_INPUT)

    MAC will get RMII clock from outside. Note that ESP32 only supports GPIO0 to input the RMII clock.

  • Output RMII clock from internal (ETH_RMII_CLK_OUTPUT)

    ESP32 can generate RMII clock by internal APLL. This clock can be routed to the external PHY device. ESP32 supports to route the RMII clock to GPIO0/16/17.

CONFIG_ETH_RMII_CLK_OUTPUT_GPIO0

Output RMII clock from GPIO0 (Experimental!)

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

GPIO0 can be set to output a pre-divided PLL clock. Enabling this option will configure GPIO0 to output a 50MHz clock. In fact this clock doesn’t have directly relationship with EMAC peripheral. Sometimes this clock may not work well with your PHY chip. WARNING: If you want the Ethernet to work with WiFi, don’t select ESP32 as RMII CLK output as it would result in clock instability!

Default value:
CONFIG_ETH_RMII_CLK_OUT_GPIO

RMII clock GPIO number

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Set the GPIO number to output RMII Clock. WARNING: If you want the Ethernet to work with WiFi, don’t select ESP32 as RMII CLK output as it would result in clock instability!

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ETH_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE

Ethernet DMA buffer size (Byte)

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Set the size of each buffer used by Ethernet MAC DMA.

Range:

  • from 256 to 1600

Default value:

  • 512

CONFIG_ETH_DMA_RX_BUFFER_NUM

Amount of Ethernet DMA Rx buffers

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Number of DMA receive buffers. Each buffer’s size is ETH_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE. Larger number of buffers could increase throughput somehow.

Range:

  • from 3 to 30

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_ETH_DMA_TX_BUFFER_NUM

Amount of Ethernet DMA Tx buffers

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Number of DMA transmit buffers. Each buffer’s size is ETH_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE. Larger number of buffers could increase throughput somehow.

Range:

  • from 3 to 30

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_ETH_SOFT_FLOW_CONTROL

Enable software flow control

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Ethernet MAC engine on ESP32 doesn’t feature a flow control logic. The MAC driver can perform a software flow control if you enable this option. Note that, if the RX buffer number is small, enabling software flow control will cause obvious performance loss.

Default value:
CONFIG_ETH_IRAM_OPTIMIZATION

Enable IRAM optimization

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

If enabled, functions related to RX/TX are placed into IRAM. It can improve Ethernet throughput. If disabled, all functions are placed into FLASH.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ETH_USE_SPI_ETHERNET

Support SPI to Ethernet Module

Found in: Component config > Ethernet

ESP-IDF can also support some SPI-Ethernet modules.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_ETH_SPI_ETHERNET_DM9051

Use DM9051

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_SPI_ETHERNET

DM9051 is a fast Ethernet controller with an SPI interface. It’s also integrated with a 10/100M PHY and MAC. Select this to enable DM9051 driver.

CONFIG_ETH_SPI_ETHERNET_W5500

Use W5500 (MAC RAW)

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_SPI_ETHERNET

W5500 is a HW TCP/IP embedded Ethernet controller. TCP/IP stack, 10/100 Ethernet MAC and PHY are embedded in a single chip. However the driver in ESP-IDF only enables the RAW MAC mode, making it compatible with the software TCP/IP stack. Say yes to enable W5500 driver.

CONFIG_ETH_SPI_ETHERNET_KSZ8851SNL

Use KSZ8851SNL

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_SPI_ETHERNET

The KSZ8851SNL is a single-chip Fast Ethernet controller consisting of a 10/100 physical layer transceiver (PHY), a MAC, and a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). Select this to enable KSZ8851SNL driver.

CONFIG_ETH_USE_OPENETH

Support OpenCores Ethernet MAC (for use with QEMU)

Found in: Component config > Ethernet

OpenCores Ethernet MAC driver can be used when an ESP-IDF application is executed in QEMU. This driver is not supported when running on a real chip.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_ETH_OPENETH_DMA_RX_BUFFER_NUM

Number of Ethernet DMA Rx buffers

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_OPENETH

Number of DMA receive buffers, each buffer is 1600 bytes.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ETH_OPENETH_DMA_TX_BUFFER_NUM

Number of Ethernet DMA Tx buffers

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_OPENETH

Number of DMA transmit buffers, each buffer is 1600 bytes.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ETH_TRANSMIT_MUTEX

Enable Transmit Mutex

Found in: Component config > Ethernet

Prevents multiple accesses when Ethernet interface is used as shared resource and multiple functionalities might try to access it at a time.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Event Loop Library

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_EVENT_LOOP_PROFILING

Enable event loop profiling

Found in: Component config > Event Loop Library

Enables collections of statistics in the event loop library such as the number of events posted to/recieved by an event loop, number of callbacks involved, number of events dropped to to a full event loop queue, run time of event handlers, and number of times/run time of each event handler.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_EVENT_POST_FROM_ISR

Support posting events from ISRs

Found in: Component config > Event Loop Library

Enable posting events from interrupt handlers.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_EVENT_POST_FROM_IRAM_ISR

Support posting events from ISRs placed in IRAM

Found in: Component config > Event Loop Library > CONFIG_ESP_EVENT_POST_FROM_ISR

Enable posting events from interrupt handlers placed in IRAM. Enabling this option places API functions esp_event_post and esp_event_post_to in IRAM.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

GDB Stub

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_GDBSTUB_SUPPORT_TASKS

Enable listing FreeRTOS tasks through GDB Stub

Found in: Component config > GDB Stub

If enabled, GDBStub can supply the list of FreeRTOS tasks to GDB. Thread list can be queried from GDB using ‘info threads’ command. Note that if GDB task lists were corrupted, this feature may not work. If GDBStub fails, try disabling this feature.

CONFIG_ESP_GDBSTUB_MAX_TASKS

Maximum number of tasks supported by GDB Stub

Found in: Component config > GDB Stub > CONFIG_ESP_GDBSTUB_SUPPORT_TASKS

Set the number of tasks which GDB Stub will support.

Default value:

ESP HTTP client

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_HTTP_CLIENT_ENABLE_HTTPS

Enable https

Found in: Component config > ESP HTTP client

This option will enable https protocol by linking esp-tls library and initializing SSL transport

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_HTTP_CLIENT_ENABLE_BASIC_AUTH

Enable HTTP Basic Authentication

Found in: Component config > ESP HTTP client

This option will enable HTTP Basic Authentication. It is disabled by default as Basic auth uses unencrypted encoding, so it introduces a vulnerability when not using TLS

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_HTTP_CLIENT_ENABLE_DIGEST_AUTH

Enable HTTP Digest Authentication

Found in: Component config > ESP HTTP client

This option will enable HTTP Digest Authentication. It is enabled by default, but use of this configuration is not recommended as the password can be derived from the exchange, so it introduces a vulnerability when not using TLS

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

HTTP Server

Contains:

CONFIG_HTTPD_MAX_REQ_HDR_LEN

Max HTTP Request Header Length

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

This sets the maximum supported size of headers section in HTTP request packet to be processed by the server

Default value:

  • 512

CONFIG_HTTPD_MAX_URI_LEN

Max HTTP URI Length

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

This sets the maximum supported size of HTTP request URI to be processed by the server

Default value:

  • 512

CONFIG_HTTPD_ERR_RESP_NO_DELAY

Use TCP_NODELAY socket option when sending HTTP error responses

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

Using TCP_NODEALY socket option ensures that HTTP error response reaches the client before the underlying socket is closed. Please note that turning this off may cause multiple test failures

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_HTTPD_PURGE_BUF_LEN

Length of temporary buffer for purging data

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

This sets the size of the temporary buffer used to receive and discard any remaining data that is received from the HTTP client in the request, but not processed as part of the server HTTP request handler.

If the remaining data is larger than the available buffer size, the buffer will be filled in multiple iterations. The buffer should be small enough to fit on the stack, but large enough to avoid excessive iterations.

Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_HTTPD_LOG_PURGE_DATA

Log purged content data at Debug level

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

Enabling this will log discarded binary HTTP request data at Debug level. For large content data this may not be desirable as it will clutter the log.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_HTTPD_WS_SUPPORT

WebSocket server support

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

This sets the WebSocket server support.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_HTTPD_QUEUE_WORK_BLOCKING

httpd_queue_work as blocking API

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

This makes httpd_queue_work() API to wait until a message space is available on UDP control socket. It internally uses a counting semaphore with count set to LWIP_UDP_RECVMBOX_SIZE to achieve this. This config will slightly change API behavior to block until message gets delivered on control socket.

ESP HTTPS OTA

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_HTTPS_OTA_DECRYPT_CB

Provide decryption callback

Found in: Component config > ESP HTTPS OTA

Exposes an additional callback whereby firmware data could be decrypted before being processed by OTA update component. This can help to integrate external encryption related format and removal of such encapsulation layer from firmware image.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_HTTPS_OTA_ALLOW_HTTP

Allow HTTP for OTA (WARNING: ONLY FOR TESTING PURPOSE, READ HELP)

Found in: Component config > ESP HTTPS OTA

It is highly recommended to keep HTTPS (along with server certificate validation) enabled. Enabling this option comes with potential risk of: - Non-encrypted communication channel with server - Accepting firmware upgrade image from server with fake identity

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

ESP HTTPS server

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_HTTPS_SERVER_ENABLE

Enable ESP_HTTPS_SERVER component

Found in: Component config > ESP HTTPS server

Enable ESP HTTPS server component

Hardware Settings

Contains:

Chip revision

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP32_REV_MIN

Minimum Supported ESP32 Revision

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > Chip revision

Required minimum chip revision. ESP-IDF will check for it and reject to boot if the chip revision fails the check. This ensures the chip used will have some modifications (features, or bugfixes).

The complied binary will only support chips above this revision, this will also help to reduce binary size.

Available options:

  • Rev v0.0 (ECO0) (ESP32_REV_MIN_0)

  • Rev v1.0 (ECO1) (ESP32_REV_MIN_1)

  • Rev v1.1 (ECO1.1) (ESP32_REV_MIN_1_1)

  • Rev v2.0 (ECO2) (ESP32_REV_MIN_2)

  • Rev v3.0 (ECO3) (ESP32_REV_MIN_3)

  • Rev v3.1 (ECO4) (ESP32_REV_MIN_3_1)

MAC Config

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP32_UNIVERSAL_MAC_ADDRESSES

Number of universally administered (by IEEE) MAC address

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > MAC Config

Configure the number of universally administered (by IEEE) MAC addresses. During initialization, MAC addresses for each network interface are generated or derived from a single base MAC address. If the number of universal MAC addresses is four, all four interfaces (WiFi station, WiFi softap, Bluetooth and Ethernet) receive a universally administered MAC address. These are generated sequentially by adding 0, 1, 2 and 3 (respectively) to the final octet of the base MAC address. If the number of universal MAC addresses is two, only two interfaces (WiFi station and Bluetooth) receive a universally administered MAC address. These are generated sequentially by adding 0 and 1 (respectively) to the base MAC address. The remaining two interfaces (WiFi softap and Ethernet) receive local MAC addresses. These are derived from the universal WiFi station and Bluetooth MAC addresses, respectively. When using the default (Espressif-assigned) base MAC address, either setting can be used. When using a custom universal MAC address range, the correct setting will depend on the allocation of MAC addresses in this range (either 2 or 4 per device.)

Available options:

  • Two (ESP32_UNIVERSAL_MAC_ADDRESSES_TWO)

  • Four (ESP32_UNIVERSAL_MAC_ADDRESSES_FOUR)

CONFIG_ESP_MAC_IGNORE_MAC_CRC_ERROR

Ignore MAC CRC error (not recommended)

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > MAC Config

If you have an invalid MAC CRC (ESP_ERR_INVALID_CRC) problem and you still want to use this chip, you can enable this option to bypass such an error. This applies to both MAC_FACTORY and CUSTOM_MAC efuses.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Sleep Config

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_SLEEP_POWER_DOWN_FLASH

Power down flash in light sleep when there is no SPIRAM

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > Sleep Config

If enabled, chip will try to power down flash as part of esp_light_sleep_start(), which costs more time when chip wakes up. Can only be enabled if there is no SPIRAM configured.

This option will power down flash under a strict but relatively safe condition. Also, it is possible to power down flash under a relaxed condition by using esp_sleep_pd_config() to set ESP_PD_DOMAIN_VDDSDIO to ESP_PD_OPTION_OFF. It should be noted that there is a risk in powering down flash, you can refer ESP-IDF Programming Guide/API Reference/System API/Sleep Modes/Power-down of Flash for more details.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_SLEEP_FLASH_LEAKAGE_WORKAROUND

Pull-up Flash CS pin in light sleep

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > Sleep Config

All IOs will be set to isolate(floating) state by default during sleep. Since the power supply of SPI Flash is not lost during lightsleep, if its CS pin is recognized as low level(selected state) in the floating state, there will be a large current leakage, and the data in Flash may be corrupted by random signals on other SPI pins. Select this option will set the CS pin of Flash to PULL-UP state during sleep, but this will increase the sleep current about 10 uA. If you are developing with esp32xx modules, you must select this option, but if you are developing with chips, you can also pull up the CS pin of SPI Flash in the external circuit to save power consumption caused by internal pull-up during sleep. (!!! Don’t deselect this option if you don’t have external SPI Flash CS pin pullups.)

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_SLEEP_PSRAM_LEAKAGE_WORKAROUND

Pull-up PSRAM CS pin in light sleep

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > Sleep Config

All IOs will be set to isolate(floating) state by default during sleep. Since the power supply of PSRAM is not lost during lightsleep, if its CS pin is recognized as low level(selected state) in the floating state, there will be a large current leakage, and the data in PSRAM may be corrupted by random signals on other SPI pins. Select this option will set the CS pin of PSRAM to PULL-UP state during sleep, but this will increase the sleep current about 10 uA. If you are developing with esp32xx modules, you must select this option, but if you are developing with chips, you can also pull up the CS pin of PSRAM in the external circuit to save power consumption caused by internal pull-up during sleep. (!!! Don’t deselect this option if you don’t have external PSRAM CS pin pullups.)

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_SLEEP_MSPI_NEED_ALL_IO_PU

Pull-up all SPI pins in light sleep

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > Sleep Config

To reduce leakage current, some types of SPI Flash/RAM only need to pull up the CS pin during light sleep. But there are also some kinds of SPI Flash/RAM that need to pull up all pins. It depends on the SPI Flash/RAM chip used.

CONFIG_ESP_SLEEP_GPIO_RESET_WORKAROUND

light sleep GPIO reset workaround

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > Sleep Config

esp32c2, esp32c3 and esp32s3 will reset at wake-up if GPIO is received a small electrostatic pulse during light sleep, with specific condition

  • GPIO needs to be configured as input-mode only

  • The pin receives a small electrostatic pulse, and reset occurs when the pulse voltage is higher than 6 V

For GPIO set to input mode only, it is not a good practice to leave it open/floating, The hardware design needs to controlled it with determined supply or ground voltage is necessary.

This option provides a software workaround for this issue. Configure to isolate all GPIO pins in sleep state.

CONFIG_ESP_SLEEP_DEEP_SLEEP_WAKEUP_DELAY

Extra delay in deep sleep wake stub (in us)

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > Sleep Config

When the chip exits deep sleep, the CPU and the flash chip are powered on at the same time. CPU will run deep sleep stub first, and then proceed to load code from flash. Some flash chips need sufficient time to pass between power on and first read operation. By default, without any extra delay, this time is approximately 900us, although some flash chip types need more than that.

By default extra delay is set to 2000us. When optimizing startup time for applications which require it, this value may be reduced.

If you are seeing “flash read err, 1000” message printed to the console after deep sleep reset, try increasing this value.

Range:

  • from 0 to 5000

Default value:

  • 2000

CONFIG_ESP_SLEEP_GPIO_ENABLE_INTERNAL_RESISTORS

Allow to enable internal pull-up/downs for the Deep-Sleep wakeup IOs

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > Sleep Config

When using rtc gpio wakeup source during deepsleep without external pull-up/downs, you may want to make use of the internal ones.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

RTC Clock Config

Contains:

CONFIG_RTC_CLK_SRC

RTC clock source

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > RTC Clock Config

Choose which clock is used as RTC clock source.

  • “Internal 150kHz oscillator” option provides lowest deep sleep current

    consumption, and does not require extra external components. However frequency stability with respect to temperature is poor, so time may drift in deep/light sleep modes.

  • “External 32kHz crystal” provides better frequency stability, at the

    expense of slightly higher (1uA) deep sleep current consumption.

  • “External 32kHz oscillator” allows using 32kHz clock generated by an

    external circuit. In this case, external clock signal must be connected to 32K_XN pin. Amplitude should be <1.2V in case of sine wave signal, and <1V in case of square wave signal. Common mode voltage should be 0.1 < Vcm < 0.5Vamp, where Vamp is the signal amplitude. Additionally, 1nF capacitor must be connected between 32K_XP pin and ground. 32K_XP pin can not be used as a GPIO in this case.

  • “Internal 8.5MHz oscillator divided by 256” option results in higher

    deep sleep current (by 5uA) but has better frequency stability than the internal 150kHz oscillator. It does not require external components.

Available options:

  • Internal 150kHz RC oscillator (RTC_CLK_SRC_INT_RC)

  • External 32kHz crystal (RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_CRYS)

  • External 32kHz oscillator at 32K_XN pin (RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_OSC)

  • Internal 8.5MHz oscillator, divided by 256 (~33kHz) (RTC_CLK_SRC_INT_8MD256)

CONFIG_RTC_EXT_CRYST_ADDIT_CURRENT_METHOD

Additional current for external 32kHz crystal

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > RTC Clock Config

With some 32kHz crystal configurations, the X32N and X32P pins may not have enough drive strength to keep the crystal oscillating. Choose the method to provide additional current from touchpad 9 to the external 32kHz crystal. Note that the deep sleep current is slightly high (4-5uA) and the touchpad and the wakeup sources of both touchpad and ULP are not available in method 1 and method 2.

This problem is fixed in ESP32 ECO 3, so this workaround is not needed. Setting the project configuration to minimum revision ECO3 will disable this option, , allow all wakeup sources, and save some code size.

  • “None” option will not provide additional current to external crystal

  • “Method 1” option can’t ensure 100% to solve the external 32k crystal start failed

    issue, but the touchpad can work in this method.

  • “Method 2” option can solve the external 32k issue, but the touchpad can’t work

    in this method.

Available options:

  • None (RTC_EXT_CRYST_ADDIT_CURRENT_NONE)

  • Method 1 (RTC_EXT_CRYST_ADDIT_CURRENT)

  • Method 2 (RTC_EXT_CRYST_ADDIT_CURRENT_V2)

CONFIG_RTC_CLK_CAL_CYCLES

Number of cycles for RTC_SLOW_CLK calibration

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > RTC Clock Config

When the startup code initializes RTC_SLOW_CLK, it can perform calibration by comparing the RTC_SLOW_CLK frequency with main XTAL frequency. This option sets the number of RTC_SLOW_CLK cycles measured by the calibration routine. Higher numbers increase calibration precision, which may be important for applications which spend a lot of time in deep sleep. Lower numbers reduce startup time.

When this option is set to 0, clock calibration will not be performed at startup, and approximate clock frequencies will be assumed:

  • 150000 Hz if internal RC oscillator is used as clock source. For this use value 1024.

  • 32768 Hz if the 32k crystal oscillator is used. For this use value 3000 or more.

    In case more value will help improve the definition of the launch of the crystal. If the crystal could not start, it will be switched to internal RC.

Range:

  • from 0 to 27000 if RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_CRYS || RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_OSC || RTC_CLK_SRC_INT_8MD256

  • from 0 to 32766

Default value:

  • 3000 if RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_CRYS || RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_OSC || RTC_CLK_SRC_INT_8MD256

  • 1024

CONFIG_RTC_XTAL_CAL_RETRY

Number of attempts to repeat 32k XTAL calibration

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > RTC Clock Config

Number of attempts to repeat 32k XTAL calibration before giving up and switching to the internal RC. Increase this option if the 32k crystal oscillator does not start and switches to internal RC.

Default value:

  • 1 if RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_CRYS

Peripheral Control

Contains:

CONFIG_PERIPH_CTRL_FUNC_IN_IRAM

Place peripheral control functions into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > Peripheral Control

Place peripheral control functions (e.g. periph_module_reset) into IRAM, so that these functions can be IRAM-safe and able to be called in the other IRAM interrupt context.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

GDMA Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_GDMA_CTRL_FUNC_IN_IRAM

Place GDMA control functions into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > GDMA Configuration

Place GDMA control functions (like start/stop/append/reset) into IRAM, so that these functions can be IRAM-safe and able to be called in the other IRAM interrupt context. Enabling this option can improve driver performance as well.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SOC_GDMA_SUPPORTED

CONFIG_GDMA_ISR_IRAM_SAFE

GDMA ISR IRAM-Safe

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > GDMA Configuration

This will ensure the GDMA interrupt handler is IRAM-Safe, allow to avoid flash cache misses, and also be able to run whilst the cache is disabled. (e.g. SPI Flash write).

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SOC_GDMA_SUPPORTED

Main XTAL Config

Contains:

CONFIG_XTAL_FREQ_SEL

Main XTAL frequency

Found in: Component config > Hardware Settings > Main XTAL Config

This option selects the operating frequency of the XTAL (crystal) clock used to drive the ESP target. The selected value MUST reflect the frequency of the given hardware.

Note: The XTAL_FREQ_AUTO option allows the ESP target to automatically estimating XTAL clock’s operating frequency. However, this feature is only supported on the ESP32. The ESP32 uses the internal 8MHZ as a reference when estimating. Due to the internal oscillator’s frequency being temperature dependent, usage of the XTAL_FREQ_AUTO is not recommended in applications that operate in high ambient temperatures or use high-temperature qualified chips and modules.

Available options:

  • 24 MHz (XTAL_FREQ_24)

  • 26 MHz (XTAL_FREQ_26)

  • 32 MHz (XTAL_FREQ_32)

  • 40 MHz (XTAL_FREQ_40)

  • Autodetect (XTAL_FREQ_AUTO)

LCD and Touch Panel

Contains:

LCD Peripheral Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_LCD_PANEL_IO_FORMAT_BUF_SIZE

LCD panel io format buffer size

Found in: Component config > LCD and Touch Panel > LCD Peripheral Configuration

LCD driver allocates an internal buffer to transform the data into a proper format, because of the endian order mismatch. This option is to set the size of the buffer, in bytes.

Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_LCD_ENABLE_DEBUG_LOG

Enable debug log

Found in: Component config > LCD and Touch Panel > LCD Peripheral Configuration

Wether to enable the debug log message for LCD driver. Note that, this option only controls the LCD driver log, won’t affect other drivers.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LCD_RGB_ISR_IRAM_SAFE

RGB LCD ISR IRAM-Safe

Found in: Component config > LCD and Touch Panel > LCD Peripheral Configuration

Ensure the LCD interrupt is IRAM-Safe by allowing the interrupt handler to be executable when the cache is disabled (e.g. SPI Flash write). If you want the LCD driver to keep flushing the screen even when cache ops disabled, you can enable this option. Note, this will also increase the IRAM usage.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SOC_LCD_RGB_SUPPORTED

CONFIG_LCD_RGB_RESTART_IN_VSYNC

Restart transmission in VSYNC

Found in: Component config > LCD and Touch Panel > LCD Peripheral Configuration

Reset the GDMA channel every VBlank to stop permanent desyncs from happening. Only need to enable it when in your application, the DMA can’t deliver data as fast as the LCD consumes it.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SOC_LCD_RGB_SUPPORTED

ESP NETIF Adapter

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_IP_LOST_TIMER_INTERVAL

IP Address lost timer interval (seconds)

Found in: Component config > ESP NETIF Adapter

The value of 0 indicates the IP lost timer is disabled, otherwise the timer is enabled.

The IP address may be lost because of some reasons, e.g. when the station disconnects from soft-AP, or when DHCP IP renew fails etc. If the IP lost timer is enabled, it will be started everytime the IP is lost. Event SYSTEM_EVENT_STA_LOST_IP will be raised if the timer expires. The IP lost timer is stopped if the station get the IP again before the timer expires.

Range:

  • from 0 to 65535

Default value:

  • 120

CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_USE_TCPIP_STACK_LIB

TCP/IP Stack Library

Found in: Component config > ESP NETIF Adapter

Choose the TCP/IP Stack to work, for example, LwIP, uIP, etc.

Available options:

  • LwIP (ESP_NETIF_TCPIP_LWIP)

    lwIP is a small independent implementation of the TCP/IP protocol suite.

  • Loopback (ESP_NETIF_LOOPBACK)

    Dummy implementation of esp-netif functionality which connects driver transmit to receive function. This option is for testing purpose only

CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_RECEIVE_REPORT_ERRORS

Use esp_err_t to report errors from esp_netif_receive

Found in: Component config > ESP NETIF Adapter

Enable if esp_netif_receive() should return error code. This is useful to inform upper layers that packet input to TCP/IP stack failed, so the upper layers could implement flow control. This option is disabled by default due to backward compatibility and will be enabled in v6.0 (IDF-7194)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_L2_TAP

Enable netif L2 TAP support

Found in: Component config > ESP NETIF Adapter

A user program can read/write link layer (L2) frames from/to ESP TAP device. The ESP TAP device can be currently associated only with Ethernet physical interfaces.

CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_L2_TAP_MAX_FDS

Maximum number of opened L2 TAP File descriptors

Found in: Component config > ESP NETIF Adapter > CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_L2_TAP

Maximum number of opened File descriptors (FD’s) associated with ESP TAP device. ESP TAP FD’s take up a certain amount of memory, and allowing fewer FD’s to be opened at the same time conserves memory.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_L2_TAP_RX_QUEUE_SIZE

Size of L2 TAP Rx queue

Found in: Component config > ESP NETIF Adapter > CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_L2_TAP

Maximum number of frames queued in opened File descriptor. Once the queue is full, the newly arriving frames are dropped until the queue has enough room to accept incoming traffic (Tail Drop queue management).

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_BRIDGE_EN

Enable LwIP IEEE 802.1D bridge

Found in: Component config > ESP NETIF Adapter

Enable LwIP IEEE 802.1D bridge support in ESP-NETIF. Note that “Number of clients store data in netif” (LWIP_NUM_NETIF_CLIENT_DATA) option needs to be properly configured to be LwIP bridge avaiable!

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

PHY

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_PHY_CALIBRATION_AND_DATA_STORAGE

Store phy calibration data in NVS

Found in: Component config > PHY

If this option is enabled, NVS will be initialized and calibration data will be loaded from there. PHY calibration will be skipped on deep sleep wakeup. If calibration data is not found, full calibration will be performed and stored in NVS. Normally, only partial calibration will be performed. If this option is disabled, full calibration will be performed.

If it’s easy that your board calibrate bad data, choose ‘n’. Two cases for example, you should choose ‘n’: 1.If your board is easy to be booted up with antenna disconnected. 2.Because of your board design, each time when you do calibration, the result are too unstable. If unsure, choose ‘y’.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_PHY_INIT_DATA_IN_PARTITION

Use a partition to store PHY init data

Found in: Component config > PHY

If enabled, PHY init data will be loaded from a partition. When using a custom partition table, make sure that PHY data partition is included (type: ‘data’, subtype: ‘phy’). With default partition tables, this is done automatically. If PHY init data is stored in a partition, it has to be flashed there, otherwise runtime error will occur.

If this option is not enabled, PHY init data will be embedded into the application binary.

If unsure, choose ‘n’.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_PHY_DEFAULT_INIT_IF_INVALID

Reset default PHY init data if invalid

Found in: Component config > PHY > CONFIG_ESP_PHY_INIT_DATA_IN_PARTITION

If enabled, PHY init data will be restored to default if it cannot be verified successfully to avoid endless bootloops.

If unsure, choose ‘n’.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_PHY_MULTIPLE_INIT_DATA_BIN

Support multiple PHY init data bin

Found in: Component config > PHY > CONFIG_ESP_PHY_INIT_DATA_IN_PARTITION

If enabled, the corresponding PHY init data type can be automatically switched according to the country code. China’s PHY init data bin is used by default. Can be modified by country information in API esp_wifi_set_country(). The priority of switching the PHY init data type is: 1. Country configured by API esp_wifi_set_country() and the parameter policy is WIFI_COUNTRY_POLICY_MANUAL. 2. Country notified by the connected AP. 3. Country configured by API esp_wifi_set_country() and the parameter policy is WIFI_COUNTRY_POLICY_AUTO.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_PHY_MULTIPLE_INIT_DATA_BIN_EMBED

Support embedded multiple phy init data bin to app bin

Found in: Component config > PHY > CONFIG_ESP_PHY_INIT_DATA_IN_PARTITION > CONFIG_ESP_PHY_MULTIPLE_INIT_DATA_BIN

If enabled, multiple phy init data bin will embedded into app bin If not enabled, multiple phy init data bin will still leave alone, and need to be flashed by users.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_PHY_INIT_DATA_ERROR

Terminate operation when PHY init data error

Found in: Component config > PHY > CONFIG_ESP_PHY_INIT_DATA_IN_PARTITION > CONFIG_ESP_PHY_MULTIPLE_INIT_DATA_BIN

If enabled, when an error occurs while the PHY init data is updated, the program will terminate and restart. If not enabled, the PHY init data will not be updated when an error occurs.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_PHY_MAX_WIFI_TX_POWER

Max WiFi TX power (dBm)

Found in: Component config > PHY

Set maximum transmit power for WiFi radio. Actual transmit power for high data rates may be lower than this setting.

Range:

  • from 10 to 20

Default value:

  • 20

CONFIG_ESP_PHY_REDUCE_TX_POWER

Reduce PHY TX power when brownout reset

Found in: Component config > PHY

When brownout reset occurs, reduce PHY TX power to keep the code running.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_PHY_CALIBRATION_MODE

Calibration mode

Found in: Component config > PHY

Select PHY calibration mode. During RF initialization, the partial calibration method is used by default for RF calibration. Full calibration takes about 100ms more than partial calibration. If boot duration is not critical, it is suggested to use the full calibration method. No calibration method is only used when the device wakes up from deep sleep.

Available options:

  • Calibration partial (ESP_PHY_RF_CAL_PARTIAL)

  • Calibration none (ESP_PHY_RF_CAL_NONE)

  • Calibration full (ESP_PHY_RF_CAL_FULL)

CONFIG_ESP_PHY_IMPROVE_RX_11B

Improve Wi-Fi receive 11b pkts

Found in: Component config > PHY

This is a workaround to improve Wi-Fi receive 11b pkts for some modules using AC-DC power supply with high interference, enable this option will sacrifice Wi-Fi OFDM receive performance. But to guarantee 11b receive performance serves as a bottom line in this case.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SOC_PHY_IMPROVE_RX_11B

Power Management

Contains:

CONFIG_PM_ENABLE

Support for power management

Found in: Component config > Power Management

If enabled, application is compiled with support for power management. This option has run-time overhead (increased interrupt latency, longer time to enter idle state), and it also reduces accuracy of RTOS ticks and timers used for timekeeping. Enable this option if application uses power management APIs.

Default value:
CONFIG_PM_DFS_INIT_AUTO

Enable dynamic frequency scaling (DFS) at startup

Found in: Component config > Power Management > CONFIG_PM_ENABLE

If enabled, startup code configures dynamic frequency scaling. Max CPU frequency is set to DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_MHZ setting, min frequency is set to XTAL frequency. If disabled, DFS will not be active until the application configures it using esp_pm_configure function.

Default value:
CONFIG_PM_PROFILING

Enable profiling counters for PM locks

Found in: Component config > Power Management > CONFIG_PM_ENABLE

If enabled, esp_pm_* functions will keep track of the amount of time each of the power management locks has been held, and esp_pm_dump_locks function will print this information. This feature can be used to analyze which locks are preventing the chip from going into a lower power state, and see what time the chip spends in each power saving mode. This feature does incur some run-time overhead, so should typically be disabled in production builds.

Default value:
CONFIG_PM_TRACE

Enable debug tracing of PM using GPIOs

Found in: Component config > Power Management > CONFIG_PM_ENABLE

If enabled, some GPIOs will be used to signal events such as RTOS ticks, frequency switching, entry/exit from idle state. Refer to pm_trace.c file for the list of GPIOs. This feature is intended to be used when analyzing/debugging behavior of power management implementation, and should be kept disabled in applications.

Default value:
CONFIG_PM_SLP_IRAM_OPT

Put lightsleep related codes in internal RAM

Found in: Component config > Power Management

If enabled, about 1.8KB of lightsleep related source code would be in IRAM and chip would sleep longer for 760us at most each time. This feature is intended to be used when lower power consumption is needed while there is enough place in IRAM to place source code.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_PM_RTOS_IDLE_OPT

Put RTOS IDLE related codes in internal RAM

Found in: Component config > Power Management

If enabled, about 260B of RTOS_IDLE related source code would be in IRAM and chip would sleep longer for 40us at most each time. This feature is intended to be used when lower power consumption is needed while there is enough place in IRAM to place source code.

CONFIG_PM_SLP_DISABLE_GPIO

Disable all GPIO when chip at sleep

Found in: Component config > Power Management

This feature is intended to disable all GPIO pins at automantic sleep to get a lower power mode. If enabled, chips will disable all GPIO pins at automantic sleep to reduce about 200~300 uA current. If you want to specifically use some pins normally as chip wakes when chip sleeps, you can call ‘gpio_sleep_sel_dis’ to disable this feature on those pins. You can also keep this feature on and call ‘gpio_sleep_set_direction’ and ‘gpio_sleep_set_pull_mode’ to have a different GPIO configuration at sleep. Waring: If you want to enable this option on ESP32, you should enable GPIO_ESP32_SUPPORT_SWITCH_SLP_PULL at first, otherwise you will not be able to switch pullup/pulldown mode.

ESP PSRAM

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIRAM

Support for external, SPI-connected RAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM

This enables support for an external SPI RAM chip, connected in parallel with the main SPI flash chip.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

SPI RAM config

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIRAM_TYPE

Type of SPI RAM chip in use

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

Available options:

  • Auto-detect (SPIRAM_TYPE_AUTO)

  • ESP-PSRAM16 or APS1604 (SPIRAM_TYPE_ESPPSRAM16)

  • ESP-PSRAM32 (SPIRAM_TYPE_ESPPSRAM32)

  • ESP-PSRAM64 or LY68L6400 (SPIRAM_TYPE_ESPPSRAM64)

CONFIG_SPIRAM_SPEED

Set RAM clock speed

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

Select the speed for the SPI RAM chip. If SPI RAM is enabled, we only support three combinations of SPI speed mode we supported now:

  1. Flash SPI running at 40Mhz and RAM SPI running at 40Mhz

  2. Flash SPI running at 80Mhz and RAM SPI running at 40Mhz

  3. Flash SPI running at 80Mhz and RAM SPI running at 80Mhz

Note: If the third mode(80Mhz+80Mhz) is enabled for SPI RAM of type 32MBit, one of the HSPI/VSPI host will be occupied by the system. Which SPI host to use can be selected by the config item SPIRAM_OCCUPY_SPI_HOST. Application code should never touch HSPI/VSPI hardware in this case. The option to select 80MHz will only be visible if the flash SPI speed is also 80MHz. (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_80M is true)

Available options:

  • 40MHz clock speed (SPIRAM_SPEED_40M)

  • 80MHz clock speed (SPIRAM_SPEED_80M)

CONFIG_SPIRAM_BOOT_INIT

Initialize SPI RAM during startup

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

If this is enabled, the SPI RAM will be enabled during initial boot. Unless you have specific requirements, you’ll want to leave this enabled so memory allocated during boot-up can also be placed in SPI RAM.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_IGNORE_NOTFOUND

Ignore PSRAM when not found

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > CONFIG_SPIRAM_BOOT_INIT

Normally, if psram initialization is enabled during compile time but not found at runtime, it is seen as an error making the CPU panic. If this is enabled, booting will complete but no PSRAM will be available. If PSRAM failed to initialize, the following configs may be affected and may need to be corrected manually. SPIRAM_TRY_ALLOCATE_WIFI_LWIP will affect some LWIP and WiFi buffer default values and range values. Enable SPIRAM_TRY_ALLOCATE_WIFI_LWIP, ESP_WIFI_AMSDU_TX_ENABLED, ESP_WIFI_CACHE_TX_BUFFER_NUM and use static WiFi Tx buffer may cause potential memory exhaustion issues. Suggest disable SPIRAM_TRY_ALLOCATE_WIFI_LWIP. Suggest disable ESP_WIFI_AMSDU_TX_ENABLED. Suggest disable ESP_WIFI_CACHE_TX_BUFFER_NUM, need clear CONFIG_FEATURE_CACHE_TX_BUF_BIT of config->feature_caps. Suggest change ESP_WIFI_TX_BUFFER from static to dynamic. Also suggest to adjust some buffer numbers to the values used without PSRAM case. Such as, ESP_WIFI_STATIC_TX_BUFFER_NUM, ESP_WIFI_DYNAMIC_TX_BUFFER_NUM.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_USE

SPI RAM access method

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

The SPI RAM can be accessed in multiple methods: by just having it available as an unmanaged memory region in the CPU’s memory map, by integrating it in the heap as ‘special’ memory needing heap_caps_malloc to allocate, or by fully integrating it making malloc() also able to return SPI RAM pointers.

Available options:

  • Integrate RAM into memory map (SPIRAM_USE_MEMMAP)

  • Make RAM allocatable using heap_caps_malloc(…, MALLOC_CAP_SPIRAM) (SPIRAM_USE_CAPS_ALLOC)

  • Make RAM allocatable using malloc() as well (SPIRAM_USE_MALLOC)

CONFIG_SPIRAM_MEMTEST

Run memory test on SPI RAM initialization

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

Runs a rudimentary memory test on initialization. Aborts when memory test fails. Disable this for slightly faster startup.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_MALLOC_ALWAYSINTERNAL

Maximum malloc() size, in bytes, to always put in internal memory

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

If malloc() is capable of also allocating SPI-connected ram, its allocation strategy will prefer to allocate chunks less than this size in internal memory, while allocations larger than this will be done from external RAM. If allocation from the preferred region fails, an attempt is made to allocate from the non-preferred region instead, so malloc() will not suddenly fail when either internal or external memory is full.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_TRY_ALLOCATE_WIFI_LWIP

Try to allocate memories of WiFi and LWIP in SPIRAM firstly. If failed, allocate internal memory

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

Try to allocate memories of WiFi and LWIP in SPIRAM firstly. If failed, try to allocate internal memory then.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if (SPIRAM_USE_CAPS_ALLOC || SPIRAM_USE_MALLOC) && CONFIG_SPIRAM

CONFIG_SPIRAM_MALLOC_RESERVE_INTERNAL

Reserve this amount of bytes for data that specifically needs to be in DMA or internal memory

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

Because the external/internal RAM allocation strategy is not always perfect, it sometimes may happen that the internal memory is entirely filled up. This causes allocations that are specifically done in internal memory, for example the stack for new tasks or memory to service DMA or have memory that’s also available when SPI cache is down, to fail. This option reserves a pool specifically for requests like that; the memory in this pool is not given out when a normal malloc() is called.

Set this to 0 to disable this feature.

Note that because FreeRTOS stacks are forced to internal memory, they will also use this memory pool; be sure to keep this in mind when adjusting this value.

Note also that the DMA reserved pool may not be one single contiguous memory region, depending on the configured size and the static memory usage of the app.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_ALLOW_BSS_SEG_EXTERNAL_MEMORY

Allow .bss segment placed in external memory

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

If enabled, variables with EXT_RAM_BSS_ATTR attribute will be placed in SPIRAM instead of internal DRAM. BSS section of lwip, net80211, pp, bt libraries will be automatically placed in SPIRAM. BSS sections from other object files and libraries can also be placed in SPIRAM through linker fragment scheme extram_bss.

Note that the variables placed in SPIRAM using EXT_RAM_BSS_ATTR will be zero initialized.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_ALLOW_NOINIT_SEG_EXTERNAL_MEMORY

Allow .noinit segment placed in external memory

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

If enabled, noinit variables can be placed in PSRAM using EXT_RAM_NOINIT_ATTR.

Note the values placed into this section will not be initialized at startup and should keep its value after software restart.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND

Enable workaround for bug in SPI RAM cache for Rev1 ESP32s

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

Revision 1 of the ESP32 has a bug that can cause a write to PSRAM not to take place in some situations when the cache line needs to be fetched from external RAM and an interrupt occurs. This enables a fix in the compiler (-mfix-esp32-psram-cache-issue) that makes sure the specific code that is vulnerable to this will not be emitted.

This will also not use any bits of newlib that are located in ROM, opting for a version that is compiled with the workaround and located in flash instead.

The workaround is not required for ESP32 revision 3 and above.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if (SPIRAM_USE_MEMMAP || SPIRAM_USE_CAPS_ALLOC || SPIRAM_USE_MALLOC) && CONFIG_SPIRAM

SPIRAM cache workaround debugging

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY

Workaround strategy

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM cache workaround debugging

Select the workaround strategy. Note that the strategy for precompiled libraries (libgcc, newlib, bt, wifi) is not affected by this selection.

Unless you know you need a different strategy, it’s suggested you stay with the default MEMW strategy. Note that DUPLDST can interfere with hardware encryption and this will be automatically disabled if this workaround is selected. ‘Insert nops’ is the workaround that was used in older esp-idf versions. This workaround still can cause faulty data transfers from/to SPI RAM in some situation.

Available options:

  • Insert memw after vulnerable instructions (default) (SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_MEMW)

  • Duplicate LD/ST for 32-bit, memw for 8/16 bit (SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_DUPLDST)

  • Insert nops between vulnerable loads/stores (old strategy, obsolete) (SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_NOPS)

SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBJMP_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s jump related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: longjmp and setjmp. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBMATH_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s math related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: abs, div, labs, ldiv, quorem, fpclassify, and nan. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBNUMPARSER_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s number parsing related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: utoa, itoa, atoi, atol, strtol, and strtoul. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBIO_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s I/O related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: wcrtomb, fvwrite, wbuf, wsetup, fputwc, wctomb_r, ungetc, makebuf, fflush, refill, and sccl. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBTIME_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s time related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: asctime, asctime_r, ctime, ctime_r, lcltime, lcltime_r, gmtime, gmtime_r, strftime, mktime, tzset_r, tzset, time, gettzinfo, systimes, month_lengths, timelocal, tzvars, tzlock, tzcalc_limits, and strptime. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBCHAR_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s characters related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: ctype_, toupper, tolower, toascii, strupr, bzero, isalnum, isalpha, isascii, isblank, iscntrl, isdigit, isgraph, islower, isprint, ispunct, isspace, and isupper. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBMEM_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s memory related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: memccpy, memchr memmove, and memrchr. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBSTR_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s string related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: strcasecmp, strcasestr, strchr, strcoll, strcpy, strcspn, strdup, strdup_r, strlcat, strlcpy, strlen, strlwr, strncasecmp, strncat, strncmp, strncpy, strndup, strndup_r, strrchr, strsep, strspn, strstr, strtok_r, and strupr. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBRAND_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s random related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: srand, rand, and rand_r. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBENV_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s environment related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: environ, envlock, and getenv_r. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBFILE_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s file related functions in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: lock, isatty, fclose, open, close, creat, read, rshift, sbrk, stdio, syssbrk, sysclose, sysopen, creat, sysread, syswrite, impure, fwalk, and findfp. Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_LIBMISC_IN_IRAM

Put libc’s miscellaneous functions in IRAM, see help

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM workaround libraries placement

The functions affected by this option are: raise and system Putting these function in IRAM will allow them to be called when flash cache is disabled but it will also reduce the available size of free IRAM for the user application.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_BANKSWITCH_ENABLE

Enable bank switching for >4MiB external RAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

The ESP32 only supports 4MiB of external RAM in its address space. The hardware does support larger memories, but these have to be bank-switched in and out of this address space. Enabling this allows you to reserve some MMU pages for this, which allows the use of the esp_himem api to manage these banks.

#Note that this is limited to 62 banks, as esp_psram_extram_writeback_cache needs some kind of mapping of #some banks below that mark to work. We cannot at this moment guarantee this to exist when himem is #enabled.

If spiram 2T mode is enabled, the size of 64Mbit psram will be changed as 32Mbit, so himem will be unusable.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if (SPIRAM_USE_MEMMAP || SPIRAM_USE_CAPS_ALLOC || SPIRAM_USE_MALLOC) && CONFIG_SPIRAM

CONFIG_SPIRAM_BANKSWITCH_RESERVE

Amount of 32K pages to reserve for bank switching

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > CONFIG_SPIRAM_BANKSWITCH_ENABLE

Select the amount of banks reserved for bank switching. Note that the amount of RAM allocatable with malloc/esp_heap_alloc_caps will decrease by 32K for each page reserved here.

Note that this reservation is only actually done if your program actually uses the himem API. Without any himem calls, the reservation is not done and the original amount of memory will be available to malloc/esp_heap_alloc_caps.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_ALLOW_STACK_EXTERNAL_MEMORY

Allow external memory as an argument to xTaskCreateStatic

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

Because some bits of the ESP32 code environment cannot be recompiled with the cache workaround, normally tasks cannot be safely run with their stack residing in external memory; for this reason xTaskCreate (and related task creaton functions) always allocate stack in internal memory and xTaskCreateStatic will check if the memory passed to it is in internal memory. If you have a task that needs a large amount of stack and does not call on ROM code in any way (no direct calls, but also no Bluetooth/WiFi), you can try enable this to cause xTaskCreateStatic to allow tasks stack in external memory.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_OCCUPY_SPI_HOST

SPI host to use for 32MBit PSRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

When both flash and PSRAM is working under 80MHz, and the PSRAM is of type 32MBit, one of the HSPI/VSPI host will be used to output the clock. Select which one to use here.

Available options:

  • HSPI host (SPI2) (SPIRAM_OCCUPY_HSPI_HOST)

  • VSPI host (SPI3) (SPIRAM_OCCUPY_VSPI_HOST)

  • Will not try to use any host, will abort if not able to use the PSRAM (SPIRAM_OCCUPY_NO_HOST)

PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-DOWD

Contains:

CONFIG_D0WD_PSRAM_CLK_IO

PSRAM CLK IO number

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-DOWD

The PSRAM CLOCK IO can be any unused GPIO, user can config it based on hardware design. If user use 1.8V flash and 1.8V psram, this value can only be one of 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17.

If configured to the same pin as Flash, PSRAM shouldn’t be rev0. Contact Espressif for more information.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_D0WD_PSRAM_CS_IO

PSRAM CS IO number

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-DOWD

The PSRAM CS IO can be any unused GPIO, user can config it based on hardware design. If user use 1.8V flash and 1.8V psram, this value can only be one of 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17.

Range:
Default value:
PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-D2WD

Contains:

CONFIG_D2WD_PSRAM_CLK_IO

PSRAM CLK IO number

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-D2WD

User can config it based on hardware design. For ESP32-D2WD chip, the psram can only be 1.8V psram, so this value can only be one of 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17.

If configured to the same pin (GPIO6) as Flash, PSRAM shouldn’t be rev0. Contact Espressif for more information.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_D2WD_PSRAM_CS_IO

PSRAM CS IO number

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-D2WD

User can config it based on hardware design. For ESP32-D2WD chip, the psram can only be 1.8V psram, so this value can only be one of 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17.

Range:
Default value:
PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-PICO-D4

Contains:

CONFIG_PICO_PSRAM_CS_IO

PSRAM CS IO number

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config > PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-PICO-D4

The PSRAM CS IO can be any unused GPIO, user can config it based on hardware design.

For ESP32-PICO chip, the psram share clock with flash, so user do not need to configure the clock IO. For the reference hardware design, please refer to https://www.espressif.com/sites/default/files/documentation/esp32-pico-d4_datasheet_en.pdf

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CUSTOM_SPIWP_SD3_PIN

Use custom SPI PSRAM WP(SD3) Pin when flash pins set in eFuse (read help)

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

This setting is only used if the SPI flash pins have been overridden by setting the eFuses SPI_PAD_CONFIG_xxx, and the SPI flash mode is DIO or DOUT.

When this is the case, the eFuse config only defines 3 of the 4 Quad I/O data pins. The WP pin (aka ESP32 pin “SD_DATA_3” or SPI flash pin “IO2”) is not specified in eFuse. The psram only has QPI mode, so a WP pin setting is necessary.

If this config item is set to N (default), the correct WP pin will be automatically used for any Espressif chip or module with integrated flash. If a custom setting is needed, set this config item to Y and specify the GPIO number connected to the WP pin.

When flash mode is set to QIO or QOUT, the PSRAM WP pin will be set the same as the SPI Flash WP pin configured in the bootloader.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_DIO || ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_DOUT) && CONFIG_SPIRAM

CONFIG_SPIRAM_SPIWP_SD3_PIN

Custom SPI PSRAM WP(SD3) Pin

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

The option “Use custom SPI PSRAM WP(SD3) pin” must be set or this value is ignored

If burning a customized set of SPI flash pins in eFuse and using DIO or DOUT mode for flash, set this value to the GPIO number of the SPIRAM WP pin.

Range:

  • from 0 to 33 if (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_DIO || ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_DOUT) && CONFIG_SPIRAM

Default value:

  • 7 if (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_DIO || ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_DOUT) && CONFIG_SPIRAM

CONFIG_SPIRAM_2T_MODE

Enable SPI PSRAM 2T mode

Found in: Component config > ESP PSRAM > CONFIG_SPIRAM > SPI RAM config

Enable this option to fix single bit errors inside 64Mbit PSRAM.

Some 64Mbit PSRAM chips have a hardware issue in the RAM which causes bit errors at multiple fixed bit positions.

Note: If this option is enabled, the 64Mbit PSRAM chip will appear to be 32Mbit in size. Applications will not be affected unless the use the esp_himem APIs, which are not supported in 2T mode.

Default value:

ESP Ringbuf

Contains:

CONFIG_RINGBUF_PLACE_FUNCTIONS_INTO_FLASH

Place non-ISR ringbuf functions into flash

Found in: Component config > ESP Ringbuf

Place non-ISR ringbuf functions (like xRingbufferCreate/xRingbufferSend) into flash. This frees up IRAM, but the functions can no longer be called when the cache is disabled.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_RINGBUF_PLACE_ISR_FUNCTIONS_INTO_FLASH

Place ISR ringbuf functions into flash

Found in: Component config > ESP Ringbuf > CONFIG_RINGBUF_PLACE_FUNCTIONS_INTO_FLASH

Place ISR ringbuf functions (like xRingbufferSendFromISR/xRingbufferReceiveFromISR) into flash. This frees up IRAM, but the functions can no longer be called when the cache is disabled or from an IRAM interrupt context.

This option is not compatible with ESP-IDF drivers which are configured to run the ISR from an IRAM context, e.g. CONFIG_UART_ISR_IN_IRAM.

Default value:

ESP System Settings

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_MHZ

CPU frequency

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

CPU frequency to be set on application startup.

Available options:

  • 40 MHz (ESP_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_MHZ_40)

  • 80 MHz (ESP_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_MHZ_80)

  • 160 MHz (ESP_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_MHZ_160)

  • 240 MHz (ESP_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_MHZ_240)

Memory

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP32_RTCDATA_IN_FAST_MEM

Place RTC_DATA_ATTR and RTC_RODATA_ATTR variables into RTC fast memory segment

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Memory

This option allows to place .rtc_data and .rtc_rodata sections into RTC fast memory segment to free the slow memory region for ULP programs. This option depends on the CONFIG_FREERTOS_UNICORE option because RTC fast memory can be accessed only by PRO_CPU core.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_USE_FIXED_STATIC_RAM_SIZE

Use fixed static RAM size

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Memory

If this option is disabled, the DRAM part of the heap starts right after the .bss section, within the dram0_0 region. As a result, adding or removing some static variables will change the available heap size.

If this option is enabled, the DRAM part of the heap starts right after the dram0_0 region, where its length is set with ESP32_FIXED_STATIC_RAM_SIZE

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_FIXED_STATIC_RAM_SIZE

Fixed Static RAM size

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Memory > CONFIG_ESP32_USE_FIXED_STATIC_RAM_SIZE

RAM size dedicated for static variables (.data & .bss sections). Please note that the actual length will be reduced by BTDM_RESERVE_DRAM if Bluetooth controller is enabled.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_IRAM_AS_8BIT_ACCESSIBLE_MEMORY

Enable IRAM as 8 bit accessible memory

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Memory

If enabled, application can use IRAM as byte accessible region for storing data (Note: IRAM region cannot be used as task stack)

This is possible due to handling of exceptions LoadStoreError (3) and LoadStoreAlignmentError (9) Each unaligned read/write access will incur a penalty of maximum of 167 CPU cycles.

Trace memory

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP32_TRAX

Use TRAX tracing feature

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Trace memory

The ESP32 contains a feature which allows you to trace the execution path the processor has taken through the program. This is stored in a chunk of 32K (16K for single-processor) of memory that can’t be used for general purposes anymore. Disable this if you do not know what this is.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_TRAX_TWOBANKS

Reserve memory for tracing both pro as well as app cpu execution

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Trace memory > CONFIG_ESP32_TRAX

The ESP32 contains a feature which allows you to trace the execution path the processor has taken through the program. This is stored in a chunk of 32K (16K for single-processor) of memory that can’t be used for general purposes anymore. Disable this if you do not know what this is.

# Memory to reverse for trace, used in linker script

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC

Panic handler behaviour

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

If FreeRTOS detects unexpected behaviour or an unhandled exception, the panic handler is invoked. Configure the panic handler’s action here.

Available options:

  • Print registers and halt (ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC_PRINT_HALT)

    Outputs the relevant registers over the serial port and halt the processor. Needs a manual reset to restart.

  • Print registers and reboot (ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC_PRINT_REBOOT)

    Outputs the relevant registers over the serial port and immediately reset the processor.

  • Silent reboot (ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC_SILENT_REBOOT)

    Just resets the processor without outputting anything

  • GDBStub on panic (ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC_GDBSTUB)

    Invoke gdbstub on the serial port, allowing for gdb to attach to it to do a postmortem of the crash.

  • GDBStub at runtime (ESP_SYSTEM_GDBSTUB_RUNTIME)

    Invoke gdbstub on the serial port, allowing for gdb to attach to it and to do a debug on runtime.

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_RTC_EXT_XTAL_BOOTSTRAP_CYCLES

Bootstrap cycles for external 32kHz crystal

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

To reduce the startup time of an external RTC crystal, we bootstrap it with a 32kHz square wave for a fixed number of cycles. Setting 0 will disable bootstrapping (if disabled, the crystal may take longer to start up or fail to oscillate under some conditions).

If this value is too high, a faulty crystal may initially start and then fail. If this value is too low, an otherwise good crystal may not start.

To accurately determine if the crystal has started, set a larger “Number of cycles for RTC_SLOW_CLK calibration” (about 3000).

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_ALLOW_RTC_FAST_MEM_AS_HEAP

Enable RTC fast memory for dynamic allocations

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

This config option allows to add RTC fast memory region to system heap with capability similar to that of DRAM region but without DMA. This memory will be consumed first per heap initialization order by early startup services and scheduler related code. Speed wise RTC fast memory operates on APB clock and hence does not have much performance impact.

Memory protection

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_PMP_IDRAM_SPLIT

Enable IRAM/DRAM split protection

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Memory protection

If enabled, the CPU watches all the memory access and raises an exception in case of any memory violation. This feature automatically splits the SRAM memory, using PMP, into data and instruction segments and sets Read/Execute permissions for the instruction part (below given splitting address) and Read/Write permissions for the data part (above the splitting address). The memory protection is effective on all access through the IRAM0 and DRAM0 buses.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SOC_CPU_IDRAM_SPLIT_USING_PMP

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_MEMPROT_FEATURE

Enable memory protection

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Memory protection

If enabled, the permission control module watches all the memory access and fires the panic handler if a permission violation is detected. This feature automatically splits the SRAM memory into data and instruction segments and sets Read/Execute permissions for the instruction part (below given splitting address) and Read/Write permissions for the data part (above the splitting address). The memory protection is effective on all access through the IRAM0 and DRAM0 buses.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SOC_MEMPROT_SUPPORTED

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_MEMPROT_FEATURE_LOCK

Lock memory protection settings

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Memory protection > CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_MEMPROT_FEATURE

Once locked, memory protection settings cannot be changed anymore. The lock is reset only on the chip startup.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_EVENT_QUEUE_SIZE

System event queue size

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

Config system event queue size in different application.

Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_EVENT_TASK_STACK_SIZE

Event loop task stack size

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

Config system event task stack size in different application.

Default value:

  • 2304

CONFIG_ESP_MAIN_TASK_STACK_SIZE

Main task stack size

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

Configure the “main task” stack size. This is the stack of the task which calls app_main(). If app_main() returns then this task is deleted and its stack memory is freed.

Default value:

  • 3584

CONFIG_ESP_MAIN_TASK_AFFINITY

Main task core affinity

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

Configure the “main task” core affinity. This is the used core of the task which calls app_main(). If app_main() returns then this task is deleted.

Available options:

  • CPU0 (ESP_MAIN_TASK_AFFINITY_CPU0)

  • CPU1 (ESP_MAIN_TASK_AFFINITY_CPU1)

  • No affinity (ESP_MAIN_TASK_AFFINITY_NO_AFFINITY)

CONFIG_ESP_MINIMAL_SHARED_STACK_SIZE

Minimal allowed size for shared stack

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

Minimal value of size, in bytes, accepted to execute a expression with shared stack.

Default value:

  • 2048

CONFIG_ESP_CONSOLE_UART

Channel for console output

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

Select where to send console output (through stdout and stderr).

  • Default is to use UART0 on pre-defined GPIOs.

  • If “Custom” is selected, UART0 or UART1 can be chosen, and any pins can be selected.

  • If “None” is selected, there will be no console output on any UART, except for initial output from ROM bootloader. This ROM output can be suppressed by GPIO strapping or EFUSE, refer to chip datasheet for details.

  • On chips with USB OTG peripheral, “USB CDC” option redirects output to the CDC port. This option uses the CDC driver in the chip ROM. This option is incompatible with TinyUSB stack.

  • On chips with an USB serial/JTAG debug controller, selecting the option for that redirects output to the CDC/ACM (serial port emulation) component of that device.

Available options:

  • Default: UART0 (ESP_CONSOLE_UART_DEFAULT)

  • USB CDC (ESP_CONSOLE_USB_CDC)

  • USB Serial/JTAG Controller (ESP_CONSOLE_USB_SERIAL_JTAG)

  • Custom UART (ESP_CONSOLE_UART_CUSTOM)

  • None (ESP_CONSOLE_NONE)

CONFIG_ESP_CONSOLE_UART_NUM

UART peripheral to use for console output (0-1)

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

This UART peripheral is used for console output from the ESP-IDF Bootloader and the app.

If the configuration is different in the Bootloader binary compared to the app binary, UART is reconfigured after the bootloader exits and the app starts.

Due to an ESP32 ROM bug, UART2 is not supported for console output via esp_rom_printf.

Available options:

  • UART0 (ESP_CONSOLE_UART_CUSTOM_NUM_0)

  • UART1 (ESP_CONSOLE_UART_CUSTOM_NUM_1)

CONFIG_ESP_CONSOLE_UART_TX_GPIO

UART TX on GPIO#

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

This GPIO is used for console UART TX output in the ESP-IDF Bootloader and the app (including boot log output and default standard output and standard error of the app).

If the configuration is different in the Bootloader binary compared to the app binary, UART is reconfigured after the bootloader exits and the app starts.

Range:

  • from 0 to 46 if ESP_CONSOLE_UART_CUSTOM

Default value:

  • 1 if ESP_CONSOLE_UART_CUSTOM

  • 43 if ESP_CONSOLE_UART_CUSTOM

CONFIG_ESP_CONSOLE_UART_RX_GPIO

UART RX on GPIO#

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

This GPIO is used for UART RX input in the ESP-IDF Bootloader and the app (including default default standard input of the app).

Note: The default ESP-IDF Bootloader configures this pin but doesn’t read anything from the UART.

If the configuration is different in the Bootloader binary compared to the app binary, UART is reconfigured after the bootloader exits and the app starts.

Range:

  • from 0 to 46 if ESP_CONSOLE_UART_CUSTOM

Default value:

  • 3 if ESP_CONSOLE_UART_CUSTOM

  • 44 if ESP_CONSOLE_UART_CUSTOM

CONFIG_ESP_CONSOLE_UART_BAUDRATE

UART console baud rate

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

This baud rate is used by both the ESP-IDF Bootloader and the app (including boot log output and default standard input/output/error of the app).

The app’s maximum baud rate depends on the UART clock source. If Power Management is disabled, the UART clock source is the APB clock and all baud rates in the available range will be sufficiently accurate. If Power Management is enabled, REF_TICK clock source is used so the baud rate is divided from 1MHz. Baud rates above 1Mbps are not possible and values between 500Kbps and 1Mbps may not be accurate.

If the configuration is different in the Bootloader binary compared to the app binary, UART is reconfigured after the bootloader exits and the app starts.

Range:
Default value:

  • 115200

CONFIG_ESP_INT_WDT

Interrupt watchdog

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

This watchdog timer can detect if the FreeRTOS tick interrupt has not been called for a certain time, either because a task turned off interrupts and did not turn them on for a long time, or because an interrupt handler did not return. It will try to invoke the panic handler first and failing that reset the SoC.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_INT_WDT_TIMEOUT_MS

Interrupt watchdog timeout (ms)

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > CONFIG_ESP_INT_WDT

The timeout of the watchdog, in miliseconds. Make this higher than the FreeRTOS tick rate.

Range:

  • from 10 to 10000

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_INT_WDT_CHECK_CPU1

Also watch CPU1 tick interrupt

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > CONFIG_ESP_INT_WDT

Also detect if interrupts on CPU 1 are disabled for too long.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_EN

Enable Task Watchdog Timer

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

The Task Watchdog Timer can be used to make sure individual tasks are still running. Enabling this option will enable the Task Watchdog Timer. It can be either initialized automatically at startup or initialized after startup (see Task Watchdog Timer API Reference)

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_INIT

Initialize Task Watchdog Timer on startup

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_EN

Enabling this option will cause the Task Watchdog Timer to be initialized automatically at startup.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_PANIC

Invoke panic handler on Task Watchdog timeout

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_EN > CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_INIT

If this option is enabled, the Task Watchdog Timer will be configured to trigger the panic handler when it times out. This can also be configured at run time (see Task Watchdog Timer API Reference)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_TIMEOUT_S

Task Watchdog timeout period (seconds)

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_EN > CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_INIT

Timeout period configuration for the Task Watchdog Timer in seconds. This is also configurable at run time (see Task Watchdog Timer API Reference)

Range:

  • from 1 to 60

Default value:

  • 5

CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_CHECK_IDLE_TASK_CPU0

Watch CPU0 Idle Task

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_EN > CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_INIT

If this option is enabled, the Task Watchdog Timer will watch the CPU0 Idle Task. Having the Task Watchdog watch the Idle Task allows for detection of CPU starvation as the Idle Task not being called is usually a symptom of CPU starvation. Starvation of the Idle Task is detrimental as FreeRTOS household tasks depend on the Idle Task getting some runtime every now and then.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_CHECK_IDLE_TASK_CPU1

Watch CPU1 Idle Task

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_EN > CONFIG_ESP_TASK_WDT_INIT

If this option is enabled, the Task Watchdog Timer will wach the CPU1 Idle Task.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_PANIC_HANDLER_IRAM

Place panic handler code in IRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

If this option is disabled (default), the panic handler code is placed in flash not IRAM. This means that if ESP-IDF crashes while flash cache is disabled, the panic handler will automatically re-enable flash cache before running GDB Stub or Core Dump. This adds some minor risk, if the flash cache status is also corrupted during the crash.

If this option is enabled, the panic handler code (including required UART functions) is placed in IRAM. This may be necessary to debug some complex issues with crashes while flash cache is disabled (for example, when writing to SPI flash) or when flash cache is corrupted when an exception is triggered.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_DEBUG_STUBS_ENABLE

OpenOCD debug stubs

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

Debug stubs are used by OpenOCD to execute pre-compiled onboard code which does some useful debugging stuff, e.g. GCOV data dump.

Default value:

  • “COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_LEVEL_DEBUG” if CONFIG_ESP32_TRAX && ESP32S2_TRAX && ESP32S3_TRAX

CONFIG_ESP_DEBUG_OCDAWARE

Make exception and panic handlers JTAG/OCD aware

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

The FreeRTOS panic and unhandled exception handers can detect a JTAG OCD debugger and instead of panicking, have the debugger stop on the offending instruction.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_CHECK_INT_LEVEL

Interrupt level to use for Interrupt Watchdog and other system checks

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

Interrupt level to use for Interrupt Watchdog and other system checks.

Available options:

  • Level 5 interrupt (ESP_SYSTEM_CHECK_INT_LEVEL_5)

    Using level 5 interrupt for Interrupt Watchdog and other system checks.

  • Level 4 interrupt (ESP_SYSTEM_CHECK_INT_LEVEL_4)

    Using level 4 interrupt for Interrupt Watchdog and other system checks.

Brownout Detector

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_BROWNOUT_DET

Hardware brownout detect & reset

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Brownout Detector

The ESP has a built-in brownout detector which can detect if the voltage is lower than a specific value. If this happens, it will reset the chip in order to prevent unintended behaviour.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL

Brownout voltage level

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings > Brownout Detector > CONFIG_ESP_BROWNOUT_DET

The brownout detector will reset the chip when the supply voltage is approximately below this level. Note that there may be some variation of brownout voltage level between each ESP chip.

#The voltage levels here are estimates, more work needs to be done to figure out the exact voltages #of the brownout threshold levels.

Available options:

  • 2.43V +/- 0.05 (ESP_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_0)

  • 2.48V +/- 0.05 (ESP_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_1)

  • 2.58V +/- 0.05 (ESP_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_2)

  • 2.62V +/- 0.05 (ESP_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_3)

  • 2.67V +/- 0.05 (ESP_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_4)

  • 2.70V +/- 0.05 (ESP_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_5)

  • 2.77V +/- 0.05 (ESP_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_6)

  • 2.80V +/- 0.05 (ESP_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_7)

CONFIG_ESP32_DISABLE_BASIC_ROM_CONSOLE

Permanently disable BASIC ROM Console

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

If set, the first time the app boots it will disable the BASIC ROM Console permanently (by burning an eFuse).

Otherwise, the BASIC ROM Console starts on reset if no valid bootloader is read from the flash.

(Enabling secure boot also disables the BASIC ROM Console by default.)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

IPC (Inter-Processor Call)

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_IPC_TASK_STACK_SIZE

Inter-Processor Call (IPC) task stack size

Found in: Component config > IPC (Inter-Processor Call)

Configure the IPC tasks stack size. An IPC task runs on each core (in dual core mode), and allows for cross-core function calls. See IPC documentation for more details. The default IPC stack size should be enough for most common simple use cases. However, users can increase/decrease the stack size to their needs.

Range:

  • from 512 to 65536

Default value:

  • 1024

CONFIG_ESP_IPC_USES_CALLERS_PRIORITY

IPC runs at caller’s priority

Found in: Component config > IPC (Inter-Processor Call)

If this option is not enabled then the IPC task will keep behavior same as prior to that of ESP-IDF v4.0, hence IPC task will run at (configMAX_PRIORITIES - 1) priority.

Default value:

High resolution timer (esp_timer)

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_TIMER_PROFILING

Enable esp_timer profiling features

Found in: Component config > High resolution timer (esp_timer)

If enabled, esp_timer_dump will dump information such as number of times the timer was started, number of times the timer has triggered, and the total time it took for the callback to run. This option has some effect on timer performance and the amount of memory used for timer storage, and should only be used for debugging/testing purposes.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_TIMER_TASK_STACK_SIZE

High-resolution timer task stack size

Found in: Component config > High resolution timer (esp_timer)

Configure the stack size of “timer_task” task. This task is used to dispatch callbacks of timers created using ets_timer and esp_timer APIs. If you are seing stack overflow errors in timer task, increase this value.

Note that this is not the same as FreeRTOS timer task. To configure FreeRTOS timer task size, see “FreeRTOS timer task stack size” option in “FreeRTOS” menu.

Range:

  • from 2048 to 65536

Default value:

  • 3584

CONFIG_ESP_TIMER_INTERRUPT_LEVEL

Interrupt level

Found in: Component config > High resolution timer (esp_timer)

It sets the interrupt level for esp_timer ISR in range 1..3. A higher level (3) helps to decrease the ISR esp_timer latency.

Range:

  • from 1 to 3

  • from 1 to 1

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_ESP_TIMER_SUPPORTS_ISR_DISPATCH_METHOD

Support ISR dispatch method

Found in: Component config > High resolution timer (esp_timer)

Allows using ESP_TIMER_ISR dispatch method (ESP_TIMER_TASK dispatch method is also avalible). - ESP_TIMER_TASK - Timer callbacks are dispatched from a high-priority esp_timer task. - ESP_TIMER_ISR - Timer callbacks are dispatched directly from the timer interrupt handler. The ISR dispatch can be used, in some cases, when a callback is very simple or need a lower-latency.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Wi-Fi

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_SW_COEXIST_ENABLE

Software controls WiFi/Bluetooth coexistence

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

If enabled, WiFi & Bluetooth coexistence is controlled by software rather than hardware. Recommended for heavy traffic scenarios. Both coexistence configuration options are automatically managed, no user intervention is required. If only Bluetooth is used, it is recommended to disable this option to reduce binary file size.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_COEX_POWER_MANAGEMENT

Support power management under coexistence

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_SW_COEXIST_ENABLE

If enabled, coexist power management will be enabled.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_RX_BUFFER_NUM

Max number of WiFi static RX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi static RX buffers. Each buffer takes approximately 1.6KB of RAM. The static rx buffers are allocated when esp_wifi_init is called, they are not freed until esp_wifi_deinit is called.

WiFi hardware use these buffers to receive all 802.11 frames. A higher number may allow higher throughput but increases memory use. If ESP32_WIFI_AMPDU_RX_ENABLED is enabled, this value is recommended to set equal or bigger than ESP32_WIFI_RX_BA_WIN in order to achieve better throughput and compatibility with both stations and APs.

Range:

  • from 2 to 25

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_DYNAMIC_RX_BUFFER_NUM

Max number of WiFi dynamic RX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi dynamic RX buffers, 0 means unlimited RX buffers will be allocated (provided sufficient free RAM). The size of each dynamic RX buffer depends on the size of the received data frame.

For each received data frame, the WiFi driver makes a copy to an RX buffer and then delivers it to the high layer TCP/IP stack. The dynamic RX buffer is freed after the higher layer has successfully received the data frame.

For some applications, WiFi data frames may be received faster than the application can process them. In these cases we may run out of memory if RX buffer number is unlimited (0).

If a dynamic RX buffer limit is set, it should be at least the number of static RX buffers.

Range:
Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_TX_BUFFER

Type of WiFi TX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select type of WiFi TX buffers:

If “Static” is selected, WiFi TX buffers are allocated when WiFi is initialized and released when WiFi is de-initialized. The size of each static TX buffer is fixed to about 1.6KB.

If “Dynamic” is selected, each WiFi TX buffer is allocated as needed when a data frame is delivered to the Wifi driver from the TCP/IP stack. The buffer is freed after the data frame has been sent by the WiFi driver. The size of each dynamic TX buffer depends on the length of each data frame sent by the TCP/IP layer.

If PSRAM is enabled, “Static” should be selected to guarantee enough WiFi TX buffers. If PSRAM is disabled, “Dynamic” should be selected to improve the utilization of RAM.

Available options:

  • Static (ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_TX_BUFFER)

  • Dynamic (ESP32_WIFI_DYNAMIC_TX_BUFFER)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_TX_BUFFER_NUM

Max number of WiFi static TX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi static TX buffers. Each buffer takes approximately 1.6KB of RAM. The static RX buffers are allocated when esp_wifi_init() is called, they are not released until esp_wifi_deinit() is called.

For each transmitted data frame from the higher layer TCP/IP stack, the WiFi driver makes a copy of it in a TX buffer. For some applications especially UDP applications, the upper layer can deliver frames faster than WiFi layer can transmit. In these cases, we may run out of TX buffers.

Range:

  • from 1 to 64 if ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_TX_BUFFER

Default value:

  • 16 if ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_TX_BUFFER

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_CACHE_TX_BUFFER_NUM

Max number of WiFi cache TX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi cache TX buffer number.

For each TX packet from uplayer, such as LWIP etc, WiFi driver needs to allocate a static TX buffer and makes a copy of uplayer packet. If WiFi driver fails to allocate the static TX buffer, it caches the uplayer packets to a dedicated buffer queue, this option is used to configure the size of the cached TX queue.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_DYNAMIC_TX_BUFFER_NUM

Max number of WiFi dynamic TX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi dynamic TX buffers. The size of each dynamic TX buffer is not fixed, it depends on the size of each transmitted data frame.

For each transmitted frame from the higher layer TCP/IP stack, the WiFi driver makes a copy of it in a TX buffer. For some applications, especially UDP applications, the upper layer can deliver frames faster than WiFi layer can transmit. In these cases, we may run out of TX buffers.

Range:

  • from 1 to 128

Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_MGMT_RX_BUFFER

Type of WiFi RX MGMT buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select type of WiFi RX MGMT buffers:

If “Static” is selected, WiFi RX MGMT buffers are allocated when WiFi is initialized and released when WiFi is de-initialized. The size of each static RX MGMT buffer is fixed to about 500 Bytes.

If “Dynamic” is selected, each WiFi RX MGMT buffer is allocated as needed when a MGMT data frame is received. The MGMT buffer is freed after the MGMT data frame has been processed by the WiFi driver.

Available options:

  • Static (ESP_WIFI_STATIC_RX_MGMT_BUFFER)

  • Dynamic (ESP_WIFI_DYNAMIC_RX_MGMT_BUFFER)

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_RX_MGMT_BUF_NUM_DEF

Max number of WiFi RX MGMT buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi RX_MGMT buffers.

For Management buffers, the number of dynamic and static management buffers is the same. In order to prevent memory fragmentation, the management buffer type should be set to static first.

Range:

  • from 1 to 10

Default value:

  • 5

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_CSI_ENABLED

WiFi CSI(Channel State Information)

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable CSI(Channel State Information) feature. CSI takes about CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_RX_BUFFER_NUM KB of RAM. If CSI is not used, it is better to disable this feature in order to save memory.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_AMPDU_TX_ENABLED

WiFi AMPDU TX

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable AMPDU TX feature

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_TX_BA_WIN

WiFi AMPDU TX BA window size

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_AMPDU_TX_ENABLED

Set the size of WiFi Block Ack TX window. Generally a bigger value means higher throughput but more memory. Most of time we should NOT change the default value unless special reason, e.g. test the maximum UDP TX throughput with iperf etc. For iperf test in shieldbox, the recommended value is 9~12.

Range:

  • from 2 to 32

Default value:

  • 6

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_AMPDU_RX_ENABLED

WiFi AMPDU RX

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable AMPDU RX feature

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_RX_BA_WIN

WiFi AMPDU RX BA window size

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_AMPDU_RX_ENABLED

Set the size of WiFi Block Ack RX window. Generally a bigger value means higher throughput and better compatibility but more memory. Most of time we should NOT change the default value unless special reason, e.g. test the maximum UDP RX throughput with iperf etc. For iperf test in shieldbox, the recommended value is 9~12. If PSRAM is used and WiFi memory is prefered to allocat in PSRAM first, the default and minimum value should be 16 to achieve better throughput and compatibility with both stations and APs.

Range:

  • from 2 to 32

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_AMSDU_TX_ENABLED

WiFi AMSDU TX

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable AMSDU TX feature

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_NVS_ENABLED

WiFi NVS flash

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable WiFi NVS flash

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_TASK_CORE_ID

WiFi Task Core ID

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Pinned WiFi task to core 0 or core 1.

Available options:

  • Core 0 (ESP32_WIFI_TASK_PINNED_TO_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (ESP32_WIFI_TASK_PINNED_TO_CORE_1)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_SOFTAP_BEACON_MAX_LEN

Max length of WiFi SoftAP Beacon

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

ESP-MESH utilizes beacon frames to detect and resolve root node conflicts (see documentation). However the default length of a beacon frame can simultaneously hold only five root node identifier structures, meaning that a root node conflict of up to five nodes can be detected at one time. In the occurence of more root nodes conflict involving more than five root nodes, the conflict resolution process will detect five of the root nodes, resolve the conflict, and re-detect more root nodes. This process will repeat until all root node conflicts are resolved. However this process can generally take a very long time.

To counter this situation, the beacon frame length can be increased such that more root nodes can be detected simultaneously. Each additional root node will require 36 bytes and should be added ontop of the default beacon frame length of 752 bytes. For example, if you want to detect 10 root nodes simultaneously, you need to set the beacon frame length as 932 (752+36*5).

Setting a longer beacon length also assists with debugging as the conflicting root nodes can be identified more quickly.

Range:

  • from 752 to 1256

Default value:

  • 752

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_MGMT_SBUF_NUM

WiFi mgmt short buffer number

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the maximum number of Wi-Fi management short buffers. These buffers are dynamically allocated, with their size determined by the length of the management packet to be sent. When a management packet is less than 64 bytes, the Wi-Fi driver classifies it as a short management packet and assigns it to one of these buffers.

Range:

  • from 6 to 32

Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_IRAM_OPT

WiFi IRAM speed optimization

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to place frequently called Wi-Fi library functions in IRAM. When this option is disabled, more than 10Kbytes of IRAM memory will be saved but Wi-Fi throughput will be reduced.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_RX_IRAM_OPT

WiFi RX IRAM speed optimization

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to place frequently called Wi-Fi library RX functions in IRAM. When this option is disabled, more than 17Kbytes of IRAM memory will be saved but Wi-Fi performance will be reduced.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_ENABLE_WPA3_SAE

Enable WPA3-Personal

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to allow the device to establish a WPA3-Personal connection with eligible AP’s. PMF (Protected Management Frames) is a prerequisite feature for a WPA3 connection, it needs to be explicitly configured before attempting connection. Please refer to the Wi-Fi Driver API Guide for details.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_ENABLE_WPA3_OWE_STA

Enable OWE STA

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to allow the device to establish OWE connection with eligible AP’s. PMF (Protected Management Frames) is a prerequisite feature for a WPA3 connection, it needs to be explicitly configured before attempting connection. Please refer to the Wi-Fi Driver API Guide for details.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_IRAM_OPT

WiFi SLP IRAM speed optimization

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to place called Wi-Fi library TBTT process and receive beacon functions in IRAM. Some functions can be put in IRAM either by ESP32_WIFI_IRAM_OPT and ESP32_WIFI_RX_IRAM_OPT, or this one. If already enabled ESP32_WIFI_IRAM_OPT, the other 7.3KB IRAM memory would be taken by this option. If already enabled ESP32_WIFI_RX_IRAM_OPT, the other 1.3KB IRAM memory would be taken by this option. If neither of them are enabled, the other 7.4KB IRAM memory would be taken by this option. Wi-Fi power-save mode average current would be reduced if this option is enabled.

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_DEFAULT_MIN_ACTIVE_TIME

Minimum active time

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_IRAM_OPT

The minimum timeout for waiting to receive data, unit: milliseconds.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_DEFAULT_MAX_ACTIVE_TIME

Maximum keep alive time

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_IRAM_OPT

The maximum time that wifi keep alive, unit: seconds.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_FTM_ENABLE

WiFi FTM

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Enable feature Fine Timing Measurement for calculating WiFi Round-Trip-Time (RTT).

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_FTM_INITIATOR_SUPPORT

FTM Initiator support

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_FTM_ENABLE

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_FTM_RESPONDER_SUPPORT

FTM Responder support

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_FTM_ENABLE

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_STA_DISCONNECTED_PM_ENABLE

Power Management for station at disconnected

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable power_management for station when disconnected. Chip will do modem-sleep when rf module is not in use any more.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_GCMP_SUPPORT

WiFi GCMP Support(GCMP128 and GCMP256)

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable GCMP support. GCMP support is compulsory for WiFi Suite-B support.

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_GMAC_SUPPORT

WiFi GMAC Support(GMAC128 and GMAC256)

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable GMAC support. GMAC support is compulsory for WiFi 192 bit certification.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SOFTAP_SUPPORT

WiFi SoftAP Support

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

WiFi module can be compiled without SoftAP to save code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_OPT

Wifi sleep optimize when beacon lost

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Enable wifi sleep optimization when beacon loss occurs and immediately enter sleep mode when the WiFi module detects beacon loss.

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_TIMEOUT

Beacon loss timeout

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_OPT

Timeout time for close rf phy when beacon loss occurs, Unit: 1024 microsecond.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_THRESHOLD

Maximum number of consecutive lost beacons allowed

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_OPT

Maximum number of consecutive lost beacons allowed, WiFi keeps Rx state when the number of consecutive beacons lost is greater than the given threshold.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_PHY_ON_DELTA_EARLY_TIME

Delta early time for RF PHY on

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_OPT

Delta early time for rf phy on, When the beacon is lost, the next rf phy on will be earlier the time specified by the configuration item, Unit: 32 microsecond.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_PHY_OFF_DELTA_TIMEOUT_TIME

Delta timeout time for RF PHY off

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_OPT

Delta timeout time for rf phy off, When the beacon is lost, the next rf phy off will be delayed for the time specified by the configuration item. Unit: 1024 microsecond.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_ESPNOW_MAX_ENCRYPT_NUM

Maximum espnow encrypt peers number

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Maximum number of encrypted peers supported by espnow. The number of hardware keys for encryption is fixed. And the espnow and SoftAP share the same hardware keys. So this configuration will affect the maximum connection number of SoftAP. Maximum espnow encrypted peers number + maximum number of connections of SoftAP = Max hardware keys number.

When using ESP mesh, this value should be set to a maximum of 6.

Range:

  • from 0 to 17

Default value:

  • 7

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_WPS_PASSPHRASE

Get WPA2 passphrase in WPS config

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to get passphrase during WPS configuration. This option fakes the virtual display capabilites to get the configuration in passphrase mode. Not recommanded to be used since WPS credentials should not be shared to other devices, making it in readable format increases that risk, also passphrase requires pbkdf2 to convert in psk.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_ENTERPRISE_SUPPORT

Enable enterprise option

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this to enable/disable enterprise connection support.

disabling this will reduce binary size. disabling this will disable the use of any esp_wifi_sta_wpa2_ent_* (as APIs will be meaningless)

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_ENT_FREE_DYNAMIC_BUFFER

Free dynamic buffers during WiFi enterprise connection

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_ENTERPRISE_SUPPORT

Select this configuration to free dynamic buffers during WiFi enterprise connection. This will enable chip to reduce heap consumption during WiFi enterprise connection.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Core dump

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_TO_FLASH_OR_UART

Data destination

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Select place to store core dump: flash, uart or none (to disable core dumps generation).

Core dumps to Flash are not available if PSRAM is used for task stacks.

If core dump is configured to be stored in flash and custom partition table is used add corresponding entry to your CSV. For examples, please see predefined partition table CSV descriptions in the components/partition_table directory.

Available options:

  • Flash (ESP_COREDUMP_ENABLE_TO_FLASH)

  • UART (ESP_COREDUMP_ENABLE_TO_UART)

  • None (ESP_COREDUMP_ENABLE_TO_NONE)

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_DATA_FORMAT

Core dump data format

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Select the data format for core dump.

Available options:

  • Binary format (ESP_COREDUMP_DATA_FORMAT_BIN)

  • ELF format (ESP_COREDUMP_DATA_FORMAT_ELF)

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_CHECKSUM

Core dump data integrity check

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Select the integrity check for the core dump.

Available options:

  • Use CRC32 for integrity verification (ESP_COREDUMP_CHECKSUM_CRC32)

  • Use SHA256 for integrity verification (ESP_COREDUMP_CHECKSUM_SHA256)

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_CHECK_BOOT

Check core dump data integrity on boot

Found in: Component config > Core dump

When enabled, if any data are found on the flash core dump partition, they will be checked by calculating their checksum.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if ESP_COREDUMP_ENABLE_TO_FLASH

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_LOGS

Enable coredump logs for debugging

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Enable/disable coredump logs. Logs strings from espcoredump component are placed in DRAM. Disabling these helps to save ~5KB of internal memory.

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_MAX_TASKS_NUM

Maximum number of tasks

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Maximum number of tasks snapshots in core dump.

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_UART_DELAY

Delay before print to UART

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Config delay (in ms) before printing core dump to UART. Delay can be interrupted by pressing Enter key.

Default value:

  • 0 if ESP_COREDUMP_ENABLE_TO_UART

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_STACK_SIZE

Reserved stack size

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Size of the memory to be reserved for core dump stack. If 0 core dump process will run on the stack of crashed task/ISR, otherwise special stack will be allocated. To ensure that core dump itself will not overflow task/ISR stack set this to the value above 800. NOTE: It eats DRAM.

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_DECODE

Handling of UART core dumps in IDF Monitor

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Available options:

  • Decode and show summary (info_corefile) (ESP_COREDUMP_DECODE_INFO)

  • Don’t decode (ESP_COREDUMP_DECODE_DISABLE)

FAT Filesystem support

Contains:

CONFIG_FATFS_VOLUME_COUNT

Number of volumes

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

Number of volumes (logical drives) to use.

Range:

  • from 1 to 10

Default value:

  • 2

CONFIG_FATFS_SECTOR_SIZE

Sector size

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

Specify the size of the sector in bytes for FATFS partition generator.

Available options:

  • 512 (FATFS_SECTOR_512)

  • 1024 (FATFS_SECTOR_1024)

  • 2048 (FATFS_SECTOR_2048)

  • 4096 (FATFS_SECTOR_4096)

CONFIG_FATFS_SECTORS_PER_CLUSTER

Sectors per cluster

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

This value specifies how many sectors there are in one cluster.

Available options:

  • 1 (FATFS_SECTORS_PER_CLUSTER_1)

  • 2 (FATFS_SECTORS_PER_CLUSTER_2)

  • 4 (FATFS_SECTORS_PER_CLUSTER_4)

  • 8 (FATFS_SECTORS_PER_CLUSTER_8)

  • 16 (FATFS_SECTORS_PER_CLUSTER_16)

  • 32 (FATFS_SECTORS_PER_CLUSTER_32)

  • 64 (FATFS_SECTORS_PER_CLUSTER_64)

  • 128 (FATFS_SECTORS_PER_CLUSTER_128)

CONFIG_FATFS_CHOOSE_CODEPAGE

OEM Code Page

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

OEM code page used for file name encodings.

If “Dynamic” is selected, code page can be chosen at runtime using f_setcp function. Note that choosing this option will increase application size by ~480kB.

Available options:

  • Dynamic (all code pages supported) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_DYNAMIC)

  • US (CP437) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_437)

  • Arabic (CP720) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_720)

  • Greek (CP737) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_737)

  • KBL (CP771) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_771)

  • Baltic (CP775) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_775)

  • Latin 1 (CP850) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_850)

  • Latin 2 (CP852) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_852)

  • Cyrillic (CP855) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_855)

  • Turkish (CP857) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_857)

  • Portugese (CP860) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_860)

  • Icelandic (CP861) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_861)

  • Hebrew (CP862) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_862)

  • Canadian French (CP863) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_863)

  • Arabic (CP864) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_864)

  • Nordic (CP865) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_865)

  • Russian (CP866) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_866)

  • Greek 2 (CP869) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_869)

  • Japanese (DBCS) (CP932) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_932)

  • Simplified Chinese (DBCS) (CP936) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_936)

  • Korean (DBCS) (CP949) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_949)

  • Traditional Chinese (DBCS) (CP950) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_950)

CONFIG_FATFS_CHOOSE_TYPE

FAT type

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

If user specifies automatic detection of the FAT type, the FATFS generator will determine the type by the size.

Available options:

  • Select a suitable FATFS type automatically. (FATFS_AUTO_TYPE)

  • FAT12 (FATFS_FAT12)

  • FAT16 (FATFS_FAT16)

CONFIG_FATFS_LONG_FILENAMES

Long filename support

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

Support long filenames in FAT. Long filename data increases memory usage. FATFS can be configured to store the buffer for long filename data in stack or heap (Currently not supported by FATFS partition generator).

Available options:

  • No long filenames (FATFS_LFN_NONE)

  • Long filename buffer in heap (FATFS_LFN_HEAP)

  • Long filename buffer on stack (FATFS_LFN_STACK)

CONFIG_FATFS_MAX_LFN

Max long filename length

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

Maximum long filename length. Can be reduced to save RAM.

Range:

  • from 12 to 255

Default value:

  • 255

CONFIG_FATFS_API_ENCODING

API character encoding

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

Choose encoding for character and string arguments/returns when using FATFS APIs. The encoding of arguments will usually depend on text editor settings.

Available options:

  • API uses ANSI/OEM encoding (FATFS_API_ENCODING_ANSI_OEM)

  • API uses UTF-8 encoding (FATFS_API_ENCODING_UTF_8)

CONFIG_FATFS_FS_LOCK

Number of simultaneously open files protected by lock function

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

This option sets the FATFS configuration value _FS_LOCK. The option _FS_LOCK switches file lock function to control duplicated file open and illegal operation to open objects.

* 0: Disable file lock function. To avoid volume corruption, application should avoid illegal open, remove and rename to the open objects.

* >0: Enable file lock function. The value defines how many files/sub-directories can be opened simultaneously under file lock control.

Note that the file lock control is independent of re-entrancy.

Range:

  • from 0 to 65535

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_FATFS_TIMEOUT_MS

Timeout for acquiring a file lock, ms

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

This option sets FATFS configuration value _FS_TIMEOUT, scaled to milliseconds. Sets the number of milliseconds FATFS will wait to acquire a mutex when operating on an open file. For example, if one task is performing a lenghty operation, another task will wait for the first task to release the lock, and time out after amount of time set by this option.

Default value:

  • 10000

CONFIG_FATFS_PER_FILE_CACHE

Use separate cache for each file

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

This option affects FATFS configuration value _FS_TINY.

If this option is set, _FS_TINY is 0, and each open file has its own cache, size of the cache is equal to the _MAX_SS variable (512 or 4096 bytes). This option uses more RAM if more than 1 file is open, but needs less reads and writes to the storage for some operations.

If this option is not set, _FS_TINY is 1, and single cache is used for all open files, size is also equal to _MAX_SS variable. This reduces the amount of heap used when multiple files are open, but increases the number of read and write operations which FATFS needs to make.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FATFS_ALLOC_PREFER_EXTRAM

Perfer external RAM when allocating FATFS buffers

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

When the option is enabled, internal buffers used by FATFS will be allocated from external RAM. If the allocation from external RAM fails, the buffer will be allocated from the internal RAM. Disable this option if optimizing for performance. Enable this option if optimizing for internal memory size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SPIRAM_USE_CAPS_ALLOC || SPIRAM_USE_MALLOC

CONFIG_FATFS_USE_FASTSEEK

Enable fast seek algorithm when using lseek function through VFS FAT

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

The fast seek feature enables fast backward/long seek operations without FAT access by using an in-memory CLMT (cluster link map table). Please note, fast-seek is only allowed for read-mode files, if a file is opened in write-mode, the seek mechanism will automatically fallback to the default implementation.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FATFS_FAST_SEEK_BUFFER_SIZE

Fast seek CLMT buffer size

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support > CONFIG_FATFS_USE_FASTSEEK

If fast seek algorithm is enabled, this defines the size of CLMT buffer used by this algorithm in 32-bit word units. This value should be chosen based on prior knowledge of maximum elements of each file entry would store.

Default value:

FreeRTOS

Contains:

Kernel

Contains:

CONFIG_FREERTOS_SMP

Run the Amazon SMP FreeRTOS kernel instead (FEATURE UNDER DEVELOPMENT)

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Amazon has released an SMP version of the FreeRTOS Kernel which can be found via the following link: https://github.com/FreeRTOS/FreeRTOS-Kernel/tree/smp

IDF has added an experimental port of this SMP kernel located in components/freertos/FreeRTOS-Kernel-SMP. Enabling this option will cause IDF to use the Amazon SMP kernel. Note that THIS FEATURE IS UNDER ACTIVE DEVELOPMENT, users use this at their own risk.

Leaving this option disabled will mean the IDF FreeRTOS kernel is used instead, which is located in: components/freertos/FreeRTOS-Kernel. Both kernel versions are SMP capable, but differ in their implementation and features.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_UNICORE

Run FreeRTOS only on first core

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

This version of FreeRTOS normally takes control of all cores of the CPU. Select this if you only want to start it on the first core. This is needed when e.g. another process needs complete control over the second core.

CONFIG_FREERTOS_HZ

configTICK_RATE_HZ

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Sets the FreeRTOS tick interrupt frequency in Hz (see configTICK_RATE_HZ documentation for more details).

Range:

  • from 1 to 1000

Default value:

  • 100

CONFIG_FREERTOS_OPTIMIZED_SCHEDULER

configUSE_PORT_OPTIMISED_TASK_SELECTION

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Enables port specific task selection method. This option can will speed up the search of ready tasks when scheduling (see configUSE_PORT_OPTIMISED_TASK_SELECTION documentation for more details).

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_CHECK_STACKOVERFLOW

configCHECK_FOR_STACK_OVERFLOW

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Enables FreeRTOS to check for stack overflows (see configCHECK_FOR_STACK_OVERFLOW documentation for more details).

Note: If users do not provide their own vApplicationStackOverflowHook() function, a default function will be provided by ESP-IDF.

Available options:

  • No checking (FREERTOS_CHECK_STACKOVERFLOW_NONE)

    Do not check for stack overflows (configCHECK_FOR_STACK_OVERFLOW = 0)

  • Check by stack pointer value (Method 1) (FREERTOS_CHECK_STACKOVERFLOW_PTRVAL)

    Check for stack overflows on each context switch by checking if the stack pointer is in a valid range. Quick but does not detect stack overflows that happened between context switches (configCHECK_FOR_STACK_OVERFLOW = 1)

  • Check using canary bytes (Method 2) (FREERTOS_CHECK_STACKOVERFLOW_CANARY)

    Places some magic bytes at the end of the stack area and on each context switch, check if these bytes are still intact. More thorough than just checking the pointer, but also slightly slower. (configCHECK_FOR_STACK_OVERFLOW = 2)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_THREAD_LOCAL_STORAGE_POINTERS

configNUM_THREAD_LOCAL_STORAGE_POINTERS

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Set the number of thread local storage pointers in each task (see configNUM_THREAD_LOCAL_STORAGE_POINTERS documentation for more details).

Note: In ESP-IDF, this value must be at least 1. Index 0 is reserved for use by the pthreads API thread-local-storage. Other indexes can be used for any desired purpose.

Range:

  • from 1 to 256

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_FREERTOS_IDLE_TASK_STACKSIZE

configMINIMAL_STACK_SIZE (Idle task stack size)

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Sets the idle task stack size in bytes (see configMINIMAL_STACK_SIZE documentation for more details).

Note:

  • ESP-IDF specifies stack sizes in bytes instead of words.

  • The default size is enough for most use cases.

  • The stack size may need to be increased above the default if the app installs idle or thread local storage cleanup hooks that use a lot of stack memory.

  • Conversely, the stack size can be reduced to the minimum if non of the idle features are used.

Range:

  • from 768 to 32768

Default value:

  • 1536

CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_IDLE_HOOK

configUSE_IDLE_HOOK

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Enables the idle task application hook (see configUSE_IDLE_HOOK documentation for more details).

Note:

  • The application must provide the hook function void vApplicationIdleHook( void );

  • vApplicationIdleHook() is called from FreeRTOS idle task(s)

  • The FreeRTOS idle hook is NOT the same as the ESP-IDF Idle Hook, but both can be enabled simultaneously.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_MINIMAL_IDLE_HOOK

Use FreeRTOS minimal idle hook

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Enables the minimal idle task application hook (see configUSE_IDLE_HOOK documentation for more details).

Note:

  • The application must provide the hook function void vApplicationMinimalIdleHook( void );

  • vApplicationMinimalIdleHook() is called from FreeRTOS minimal idle task(s)

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TICK_HOOK

configUSE_TICK_HOOK

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Enables the tick hook (see configUSE_TICK_HOOK documentation for more details).

Note:

  • The application must provide the hook function void vApplicationTickHook( void );

  • vApplicationTickHook() is called from FreeRTOS’s tick handling function xTaskIncrementTick()

  • The FreeRTOS tick hook is NOT the same as the ESP-IDF Tick Interrupt Hook, but both can be enabled simultaneously.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_MAX_TASK_NAME_LEN

configMAX_TASK_NAME_LEN

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Sets the maximum number of characters for task names (see configMAX_TASK_NAME_LEN documentation for more details).

Note: For most uses, the default of 16 characters is sufficient.

Range:

  • from 1 to 256

Default value:

  • 16

CONFIG_FREERTOS_ENABLE_BACKWARD_COMPATIBILITY

configENABLE_BACKWARD_COMPATIBILITY

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Enable backward compatibility with APIs prior to FreeRTOS v8.0.0. (see configENABLE_BACKWARD_COMPATIBILITY documentation for more details).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_TIMER_TASK_PRIORITY

configTIMER_TASK_PRIORITY

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Sets the timer task’s priority (see configTIMER_TASK_PRIORITY documentation for more details).

Range:

  • from 1 to 25

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_FREERTOS_TIMER_TASK_STACK_DEPTH

configTIMER_TASK_STACK_DEPTH

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Set the timer task’s stack size (see configTIMER_TASK_STACK_DEPTH documentation for more details).

Range:

  • from 1536 to 32768

Default value:

  • 2048

CONFIG_FREERTOS_TIMER_QUEUE_LENGTH

configTIMER_QUEUE_LENGTH

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Set the timer task’s command queue length (see configTIMER_QUEUE_LENGTH documentation for more details).

Range:

  • from 5 to 20

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_FREERTOS_QUEUE_REGISTRY_SIZE

configQUEUE_REGISTRY_SIZE

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Set the size of the queue registry (see configQUEUE_REGISTRY_SIZE documentation for more details).

Note: A value of 0 will disable queue registry functionality

Range:

  • from 0 to 20

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TRACE_FACILITY

configUSE_TRACE_FACILITY

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Enables additional structure members and functions to assist with execution visualization and tracing (see configUSE_TRACE_FACILITY documentation for more details).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_STATS_FORMATTING_FUNCTIONS

configUSE_STATS_FORMATTING_FUNCTIONS

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel > CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TRACE_FACILITY

Set configUSE_TRACE_FACILITY and configUSE_STATS_FORMATTING_FUNCTIONS to 1 to include the vTaskList() and vTaskGetRunTimeStats() functions in the build (see configUSE_STATS_FORMATTING_FUNCTIONS documentation for more details).

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_VTASKLIST_INCLUDE_COREID

Enable display of xCoreID in vTaskList

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel > CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TRACE_FACILITY > CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_STATS_FORMATTING_FUNCTIONS

If enabled, this will include an extra column when vTaskList is called to display the CoreID the task is pinned to (0,1) or -1 if not pinned.

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_GENERATE_RUN_TIME_STATS

configGENERATE_RUN_TIME_STATS

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

Enables collection of run time statistics for each task (see configGENERATE_RUN_TIME_STATS documentation for more details).

Note: The clock used for run time statistics can be configured in FREERTOS_RUN_TIME_STATS_CLK.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TICKLESS_IDLE

configUSE_TICKLESS_IDLE

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel

If power management support is enabled, FreeRTOS will be able to put the system into light sleep mode when no tasks need to run for a number of ticks. This number can be set using FREERTOS_IDLE_TIME_BEFORE_SLEEP option. This feature is also known as “automatic light sleep”.

Note that timers created using esp_timer APIs may prevent the system from entering sleep mode, even when no tasks need to run. To skip unnecessary wake-up initialize a timer with the “skip_unhandled_events” option as true.

If disabled, automatic light sleep support will be disabled.

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_IDLE_TIME_BEFORE_SLEEP

configEXPECTED_IDLE_TIME_BEFORE_SLEEP

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Kernel > CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TICKLESS_IDLE

FreeRTOS will enter light sleep mode if no tasks need to run for this number of ticks.

Range:
Default value:
Port

Contains:

CONFIG_FREERTOS_TASK_FUNCTION_WRAPPER

Wrap task functions

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

If enabled, all FreeRTOS task functions will be enclosed in a wrapper function. If a task function mistakenly returns (i.e. does not delete), the call flow will return to the wrapper function. The wrapper function will then log an error and abort the application. This option is also required for GDB backtraces and C++ exceptions to work correctly inside top-level task functions.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_WATCHPOINT_END_OF_STACK

Enable stack overflow debug watchpoint

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

FreeRTOS can check if a stack has overflown its bounds by checking either the value of the stack pointer or by checking the integrity of canary bytes. (See FREERTOS_CHECK_STACKOVERFLOW for more information.) These checks only happen on a context switch, and the situation that caused the stack overflow may already be long gone by then. This option will use the last debug memory watchpoint to allow breaking into the debugger (or panic’ing) as soon as any of the last 32 bytes on the stack of a task are overwritten. The side effect is that using gdb, you effectively have one hardware watchpoint less because the last one is overwritten as soon as a task switch happens.

Another consequence is that due to alignment requirements of the watchpoint, the usable stack size decreases by up to 60 bytes. This is because the watchpoint region has to be aligned to its size and the size for the stack watchpoint in IDF is 32 bytes.

This check only triggers if the stack overflow writes within 32 bytes near the end of the stack, rather than overshooting further, so it is worth combining this approach with one of the other stack overflow check methods.

When this watchpoint is hit, gdb will stop with a SIGTRAP message. When no JTAG OCD is attached, esp-idf will panic on an unhandled debug exception.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_TLSP_DELETION_CALLBACKS

Enable thread local storage pointers deletion callbacks

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

ESP-IDF provides users with the ability to free TLSP memory by registering TLSP deletion callbacks. These callbacks are automatically called by FreeRTOS when a task is deleted. When this option is turned on, the memory reserved for TLSPs in the TCB is doubled to make space for storing the deletion callbacks. If the user does not wish to use TLSP deletion callbacks then this option could be turned off to save space in the TCB memory.

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_ENABLE_STATIC_TASK_CLEAN_UP

Enable static task clean up hook

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

Enable this option to make FreeRTOS call the static task clean up hook when a task is deleted.

Note: Users will need to provide a void vPortCleanUpTCB ( void \*pxTCB ) callback

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_CHECK_MUTEX_GIVEN_BY_OWNER

Check that mutex semaphore is given by owner task

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

If enabled, assert that when a mutex semaphore is given, the task giving the semaphore is the task which is currently holding the mutex.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_ISR_STACKSIZE

ISR stack size

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

The interrupt handlers have their own stack. The size of the stack can be defined here. Each processor has its own stack, so the total size occupied will be twice this.

Range:

  • from 2096 to 32768 if ESP_COREDUMP_DATA_FORMAT_ELF

  • from 1536 to 32768

Default value:

  • 2096 if ESP_COREDUMP_DATA_FORMAT_ELF

  • 1536

CONFIG_FREERTOS_INTERRUPT_BACKTRACE

Enable backtrace from interrupt to task context

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

If this option is enabled, interrupt stack frame will be modified to point to the code of the interrupted task as its return address. This helps the debugger (or the panic handler) show a backtrace from the interrupt to the task which was interrupted. This also works for nested interrupts: higher level interrupt stack can be traced back to the lower level interrupt. This option adds 4 instructions to the interrupt dispatching code.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_FPU_IN_ISR

Use float in Level 1 ISR

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

When enabled, the usage of float type is allowed inside Level 1 ISRs. Note that usage of float types in higher level interrupts is still not permitted.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_CORETIMER

Tick timer source (Xtensa Only)

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

FreeRTOS needs a timer with an associated interrupt to use as the main tick source to increase counters, run timers and do pre-emptive multitasking with. There are multiple timers available to do this, with different interrupt priorities.

Available options:

  • Timer 0 (int 6, level 1) (FREERTOS_CORETIMER_0)

    Select this to use timer 0

  • Timer 1 (int 15, level 3) (FREERTOS_CORETIMER_1)

    Select this to use timer 1

  • SYSTIMER 0 (level 1) (FREERTOS_CORETIMER_SYSTIMER_LVL1)

    Select this to use systimer with the 1 interrupt priority.

  • SYSTIMER 0 (level 3) (FREERTOS_CORETIMER_SYSTIMER_LVL3)

    Select this to use systimer with the 3 interrupt priority.

CONFIG_FREERTOS_RUN_TIME_STATS_CLK

Choose the clock source for run time stats

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

Choose the clock source for FreeRTOS run time stats. Options are CPU0’s CPU Clock or the ESP Timer. Both clock sources are 32 bits. The CPU Clock can run at a higher frequency hence provide a finer resolution but will overflow much quicker. Note that run time stats are only valid until the clock source overflows.

Available options:

  • Use ESP TIMER for run time stats (FREERTOS_RUN_TIME_STATS_USING_ESP_TIMER)

    ESP Timer will be used as the clock source for FreeRTOS run time stats. The ESP Timer runs at a frequency of 1MHz regardless of Dynamic Frequency Scaling. Therefore the ESP Timer will overflow in approximately 4290 seconds.

  • Use CPU Clock for run time stats (FREERTOS_RUN_TIME_STATS_USING_CPU_CLK)

    CPU Clock will be used as the clock source for the generation of run time stats. The CPU Clock has a frequency dependent on ESP_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_MHZ and Dynamic Frequency Scaling (DFS). Therefore the CPU Clock frequency can fluctuate between 80 to 240MHz. Run time stats generated using the CPU Clock represents the number of CPU cycles each task is allocated and DOES NOT reflect the amount of time each task runs for (as CPU clock frequency can change). If the CPU clock consistently runs at the maximum frequency of 240MHz, it will overflow in approximately 17 seconds.

CONFIG_FREERTOS_PLACE_FUNCTIONS_INTO_FLASH

Place FreeRTOS functions into Flash

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

When enabled the selected Non-ISR FreeRTOS functions will be placed into Flash memory instead of IRAM. This saves up to 8KB of IRAM depending on which functions are used.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_PLACE_SNAPSHOT_FUNS_INTO_FLASH

Place task snapshot functions into flash

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

When enabled, the functions related to snapshots, such as vTaskGetSnapshot or uxTaskGetSnapshotAll, will be placed in flash. Note that if enabled, these functions cannot be called when cache is disabled.

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_CHECK_PORT_CRITICAL_COMPLIANCE

Tests compliance with Vanilla FreeRTOS port*_CRITICAL calls

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

If enabled, context of port*_CRITICAL calls (ISR or Non-ISR) would be checked to be in compliance with Vanilla FreeRTOS. e.g Calling port*_CRITICAL from ISR context would cause assert failure

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_ASSERT_ON_UNTESTED_FUNCTION

Halt when an SMP-untested function is called

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

Some functions in FreeRTOS have not been thoroughly tested yet when moving to the SMP implementation of FreeRTOS. When this option is enabled, these functions will throw an assert().

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_ENABLE_TASK_SNAPSHOT

Enable task snapshot functions

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > Port

When enabled, the functions related to snapshots, such as vTaskGetSnapshot or uxTaskGetSnapshotAll, are compiled and linked. Task snapshots are used by Task Watchdog (TWDT), GDB Stub and Core dump.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) and Low Level (LL)

Contains:

CONFIG_HAL_DEFAULT_ASSERTION_LEVEL

Default HAL assertion level

Found in: Component config > Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) and Low Level (LL)

Set the assert behavior / level for HAL component. HAL component assert level can be set separately, but the level can’t exceed the system assertion level. e.g. If the system assertion is disabled, then the HAL assertion can’t be enabled either. If the system assertion is enable, then the HAL assertion can still be disabled by this Kconfig option.

Available options:

  • Same as system assertion level (HAL_ASSERTION_EQUALS_SYSTEM)

  • Disabled (HAL_ASSERTION_DISABLE)

  • Silent (HAL_ASSERTION_SILENT)

  • Enabled (HAL_ASSERTION_ENABLE)

CONFIG_HAL_LOG_LEVEL

HAL layer log verbosity

Found in: Component config > Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) and Low Level (LL)

Specify how much output to see in HAL logs.

Available options:

  • No output (HAL_LOG_LEVEL_NONE)

  • Error (HAL_LOG_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • Warning (HAL_LOG_LEVEL_WARN)

  • Info (HAL_LOG_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug (HAL_LOG_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • Verbose (HAL_LOG_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_HAL_SYSTIMER_USE_ROM_IMPL

Use ROM implementation of SysTimer HAL driver

Found in: Component config > Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) and Low Level (LL)

Enable this flag to use HAL functions from ROM instead of ESP-IDF.

If keeping this as “n” in your project, you will have less free IRAM. If making this as “y” in your project, you will increase free IRAM, but you will lose the possibility to debug this module, and some new features will be added and bugs will be fixed in the IDF source but cannot be synced to ROM.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if ESP_ROM_HAS_HAL_SYSTIMER

CONFIG_HAL_WDT_USE_ROM_IMPL

Use ROM implementation of WDT HAL driver

Found in: Component config > Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) and Low Level (LL)

Enable this flag to use HAL functions from ROM instead of ESP-IDF.

If keeping this as “n” in your project, you will have less free IRAM. If making this as “y” in your project, you will increase free IRAM, but you will lose the possibility to debug this module, and some new features will be added and bugs will be fixed in the IDF source but cannot be synced to ROM.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if ESP_ROM_HAS_HAL_WDT

Heap memory debugging

Contains:

CONFIG_HEAP_CORRUPTION_DETECTION

Heap corruption detection

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

Enable heap poisoning features to detect heap corruption caused by out-of-bounds access to heap memory.

See the “Heap Memory Debugging” page of the IDF documentation for a description of each level of heap corruption detection.

Available options:

  • Basic (no poisoning) (HEAP_POISONING_DISABLED)

  • Light impact (HEAP_POISONING_LIGHT)

  • Comprehensive (HEAP_POISONING_COMPREHENSIVE)

CONFIG_HEAP_TRACING_DEST

Heap tracing

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

Enables the heap tracing API defined in esp_heap_trace.h.

This function causes a moderate increase in IRAM code side and a minor increase in heap function (malloc/free/realloc) CPU overhead, even when the tracing feature is not used. So it’s best to keep it disabled unless tracing is being used.

Available options:

  • Disabled (HEAP_TRACING_OFF)

  • Standalone (HEAP_TRACING_STANDALONE)

  • Host-based (HEAP_TRACING_TOHOST)

CONFIG_HEAP_TRACING_STACK_DEPTH

Heap tracing stack depth

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

Number of stack frames to save when tracing heap operation callers.

More stack frames uses more memory in the heap trace buffer (and slows down allocation), but can provide useful information.

CONFIG_HEAP_TASK_TRACKING

Enable heap task tracking

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

Enables tracking the task responsible for each heap allocation.

This function depends on heap poisoning being enabled and adds four more bytes of overhead for each block allocated.

CONFIG_HEAP_ABORT_WHEN_ALLOCATION_FAILS

Abort if memory allocation fails

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

When enabled, if a memory allocation operation fails it will cause a system abort.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_HEAP_TLSF_USE_ROM_IMPL

Use ROM implementation of heap tlsf library

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

Enable this flag to use heap functions from ROM instead of ESP-IDF.

If keeping this as “n” in your project, you will have less free IRAM. If making this as “y” in your project, you will increase free IRAM, but you will lose the possibility to debug this module, and some new features will be added and bugs will be fixed in the IDF source but cannot be synced to ROM.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if ESP_ROM_HAS_HEAP_TLSF

Log output

Contains:

CONFIG_LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL

Default log verbosity

Found in: Component config > Log output

Specify how much output to see in logs by default. You can set lower verbosity level at runtime using esp_log_level_set function.

By default, this setting limits which log statements are compiled into the program. For example, selecting “Warning” would mean that changing log level to “Debug” at runtime will not be possible. To allow increasing log level above the default at runtime, see the next option.

Available options:

  • No output (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_NONE)

  • Error (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • Warning (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_WARN)

  • Info (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • Verbose (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_LOG_MAXIMUM_LEVEL

Maximum log verbosity

Found in: Component config > Log output

This config option sets the highest log verbosity that it’s possible to select at runtime by calling esp_log_level_set(). This level may be higher than the default verbosity level which is set when the app starts up.

This can be used enable debugging output only at a critical point, for a particular tag, or to minimize startup time but then enable more logs once the firmware has loaded.

Note that increasing the maximum available log level will increase the firmware binary size.

This option only applies to logging from the app, the bootloader log level is fixed at compile time to the separate “Bootloader log verbosity” setting.

Available options:

  • Same as default (LOG_MAXIMUM_EQUALS_DEFAULT)

  • Error (LOG_MAXIMUM_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • Warning (LOG_MAXIMUM_LEVEL_WARN)

  • Info (LOG_MAXIMUM_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug (LOG_MAXIMUM_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • Verbose (LOG_MAXIMUM_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_LOG_COLORS

Use ANSI terminal colors in log output

Found in: Component config > Log output

Enable ANSI terminal color codes in bootloader output.

In order to view these, your terminal program must support ANSI color codes.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LOG_TIMESTAMP_SOURCE

Log Timestamps

Found in: Component config > Log output

Choose what sort of timestamp is displayed in the log output:

  • Milliseconds since boot is calulated from the RTOS tick count multiplied by the tick period. This time will reset after a software reboot. e.g. (90000)

  • System time is taken from POSIX time functions which use the chip’s RTC and high resoultion timers to maintain an accurate time. The system time is initialized to 0 on startup, it can be set with an SNTP sync, or with POSIX time functions. This time will not reset after a software reboot. e.g. (00:01:30.000)

  • NOTE: Currently this will not get used in logging from binary blobs (i.e WiFi & Bluetooth libraries), these will always print milliseconds since boot.

Available options:

  • Milliseconds Since Boot (LOG_TIMESTAMP_SOURCE_RTOS)

  • System Time (LOG_TIMESTAMP_SOURCE_SYSTEM)

LWIP

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_LOCAL_HOSTNAME

Local netif hostname

Found in: Component config > LWIP

The default name this device will report to other devices on the network. Could be updated at runtime with esp_netif_set_hostname()

Default value:

  • “espressif”

CONFIG_LWIP_NETIF_API

Enable usage of standard POSIX APIs in LWIP

Found in: Component config > LWIP

If this feature is enabled, standard POSIX APIs: if_indextoname(), if_nametoindex() could be used to convert network interface index to name instead of IDF specific esp-netif APIs (such as esp_netif_get_netif_impl_name())

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_PRIO

LWIP TCP/IP Task Priority

Found in: Component config > LWIP

LWIP tcpip task priority. In case of high throughput, this parameter could be changed up to (configMAX_PRIORITIES-1).

Range:

  • from 1 to 24

Default value:

  • 18

CONFIG_LWIP_TCPIP_CORE_LOCKING

Enable tcpip core locking

Found in: Component config > LWIP

If Enable tcpip core locking,Creates a global mutex that is held during TCPIP thread operations.Can be locked by client code to perform lwIP operations without changing into TCPIP thread using callbacks. See LOCK_TCPIP_CORE() and UNLOCK_TCPIP_CORE().

If disable tcpip core locking,TCP IP will perform tasks through context switching

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCPIP_CORE_LOCKING_INPUT

Enable tcpip core locking input

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_TCPIP_CORE_LOCKING

when LWIP_TCPIP_CORE_LOCKING is enabled, this lets tcpip_input() grab the mutex for input packets as well, instead of allocating a message and passing it to tcpip_thread.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_CHECK_THREAD_SAFETY

Checks that lwip API runs in expected context

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable to check that the project does not violate lwip thread safety. If enabled, all lwip functions that require thread awareness run an assertion to verify that the TCP/IP core functionality is either locked or accessed from the correct thread.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DNS_SUPPORT_MDNS_QUERIES

Enable mDNS queries in resolving host name

Found in: Component config > LWIP

If this feature is enabled, standard API such as gethostbyname support .local addresses by sending one shot multicast mDNS query

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_L2_TO_L3_COPY

Enable copy between Layer2 and Layer3 packets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

If this feature is enabled, all traffic from layer2(WIFI Driver) will be copied to a new buffer before sending it to layer3(LWIP stack), freeing the layer2 buffer. Please be notified that the total layer2 receiving buffer is fixed and ESP32 currently supports 25 layer2 receiving buffer, when layer2 buffer runs out of memory, then the incoming packets will be dropped in hardware. The layer3 buffer is allocated from the heap, so the total layer3 receiving buffer depends on the available heap size, when heap runs out of memory, no copy will be sent to layer3 and packet will be dropped in layer2. Please make sure you fully understand the impact of this feature before enabling it.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IRAM_OPTIMIZATION

Enable LWIP IRAM optimization

Found in: Component config > LWIP

If this feature is enabled, some functions relating to RX/TX in LWIP will be put into IRAM, it can improve UDP/TCP throughput by >10% for single core mode, it doesn’t help too much for dual core mode. On the other hand, it needs about 10KB IRAM for these optimizations.

If this feature is disabled, all lwip functions will be put into FLASH.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TIMERS_ONDEMAND

Enable LWIP Timers on demand

Found in: Component config > LWIP

If this feature is enabled, IGMP and MLD6 timers will be activated only when joining groups or receiving QUERY packets.

This feature will reduce the power consumption for applications which do not use IGMP and MLD6.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_MAX_SOCKETS

Max number of open sockets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Sockets take up a certain amount of memory, and allowing fewer sockets to be open at the same time conserves memory. Specify the maximum amount of sockets here. The valid value is from 1 to 16.

Range:

  • from 1 to 16

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_LWIP_USE_ONLY_LWIP_SELECT

Support LWIP socket select() only (DEPRECATED)

Found in: Component config > LWIP

This option is deprecated. Do not use this option, use VFS_SUPPORT_SELECT instead.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_SO_LINGER

Enable SO_LINGER processing

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows SO_LINGER processing. l_onoff = 1,l_linger can set the timeout.

If l_linger=0, When a connection is closed, TCP will terminate the connection. This means that TCP will discard any data packets stored in the socket send buffer and send an RST to the peer.

If l_linger!=0,Then closesocket() calls to block the process until the remaining data packets has been sent or timed out.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_SO_REUSE

Enable SO_REUSEADDR option

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows binding to a port which remains in TIME_WAIT.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_SO_REUSE_RXTOALL

SO_REUSEADDR copies broadcast/multicast to all matches

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_SO_REUSE

Enabling this option means that any incoming broadcast or multicast packet will be copied to all of the local sockets that it matches (may be more than one if SO_REUSEADDR is set on the socket.)

This increases memory overhead as the packets need to be copied, however they are only copied per matching socket. You can safely disable it if you don’t plan to receive broadcast or multicast traffic on more than one socket at a time.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_SO_RCVBUF

Enable SO_RCVBUF option

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows checking for available data on a netconn.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_NETBUF_RECVINFO

Enable IP_PKTINFO option

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows checking for the destination address of a received IPv4 Packet.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IP_DEFAULT_TTL

The value for Time-To-Live used by transport layers

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Set value for Time-To-Live used by transport layers.

Range:

  • from 1 to 255

Default value:

  • 64

CONFIG_LWIP_IP4_FRAG

Enable fragment outgoing IP4 packets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows fragmenting outgoing IP4 packets if their size exceeds MTU.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IP6_FRAG

Enable fragment outgoing IP6 packets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows fragmenting outgoing IP6 packets if their size exceeds MTU.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IP4_REASSEMBLY

Enable reassembly incoming fragmented IP4 packets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows reassemblying incoming fragmented IP4 packets.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IP6_REASSEMBLY

Enable reassembly incoming fragmented IP6 packets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows reassemblying incoming fragmented IP6 packets.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IP_FORWARD

Enable IP forwarding

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows packets forwarding across multiple interfaces.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IPV4_NAPT

Enable NAT (new/experimental)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_IP_FORWARD

Enabling this option allows Network Address and Port Translation.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_STATS

Enable LWIP statistics

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows LWIP statistics

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_ESP_GRATUITOUS_ARP

Send gratuitous ARP periodically

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable this option allows to send gratuitous ARP periodically.

This option solve the compatibility issues.If the ARP table of the AP is old, and the AP doesn’t send ARP request to update it’s ARP table, this will lead to the STA sending IP packet fail. Thus we send gratuitous ARP periodically to let AP update it’s ARP table.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_GARP_TMR_INTERVAL

GARP timer interval(seconds)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_ESP_GRATUITOUS_ARP

Set the timer interval for gratuitous ARP. The default value is 60s

Default value:

  • 60

CONFIG_LWIP_ESP_MLDV6_REPORT

Send mldv6 report periodically

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable this option allows to send mldv6 report periodically.

This option solve the issue that failed to receive multicast data. Some routers fail to forward multicast packets. To solve this problem, send multicast mdlv6 report to routers regularly.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_MLDV6_TMR_INTERVAL

mldv6 report timer interval(seconds)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_ESP_MLDV6_REPORT

Set the timer interval for mldv6 report. The default value is 30s

Default value:

  • 40

CONFIG_LWIP_TCPIP_RECVMBOX_SIZE

TCPIP task receive mail box size

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Set TCPIP task receive mail box size. Generally bigger value means higher throughput but more memory. The value should be bigger than UDP/TCP mail box size.

Range:
Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_DOES_ARP_CHECK

DHCP: Perform ARP check on any offered address

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option performs a check (via ARP request) if the offered IP address is not already in use by another host on the network.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_DISABLE_CLIENT_ID

DHCP: Disable Use of HW address as client identification

Found in: Component config > LWIP

This option could be used to disable DHCP client identification with its MAC address. (Client id is used by DHCP servers to uniquely identify clients and are included in the DHCP packets as an option 61) Set this option to “y” in order to exclude option 61 from DHCP packets.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_DISABLE_VENDOR_CLASS_ID

DHCP: Disable Use of vendor class identification

Found in: Component config > LWIP

This option could be used to disable DHCP client vendor class identification. Set this option to “y” in order to exclude option 60 from DHCP packets.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_RESTORE_LAST_IP

DHCP: Restore last IP obtained from DHCP server

Found in: Component config > LWIP

When this option is enabled, DHCP client tries to re-obtain last valid IP address obtained from DHCP server. Last valid DHCP configuration is stored in nvs and restored after reset/power-up. If IP is still available, there is no need for sending discovery message to DHCP server and save some time.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_OPTIONS_LEN

DHCP total option length

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Set total length of outgoing DHCP option msg. Generally bigger value means it can carry more options and values. If your code meets LWIP_ASSERT due to option value is too long. Please increase the LWIP_DHCP_OPTIONS_LEN value.

Range:

  • from 68 to 255

Default value:

  • 68

  • 108

CONFIG_LWIP_NUM_NETIF_CLIENT_DATA

Number of clients store data in netif

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Number of clients that may store data in client_data member array of struct netif.

Range:

  • from 0 to 256

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_COARSE_TIMER_SECS

DHCP coarse timer interval(s)

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Set DHCP coarse interval in seconds. A higher value will be less precise but cost less power consumption.

Range:

  • from 1 to 10

Default value:

  • 1

DHCP server

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCPS

DHCPS: Enable IPv4 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server (DHCPS)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > DHCP server

Enabling this option allows the device to run the DHCP server (to dynamically assign IPv4 addresses to clients).

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCPS_LEASE_UNIT

Multiplier for lease time, in seconds

Found in: Component config > LWIP > DHCP server > CONFIG_LWIP_DHCPS

The DHCP server is calculating lease time multiplying the sent and received times by this number of seconds per unit. The default is 60, that equals one minute.

Range:

  • from 1 to 3600

Default value:

  • 60

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCPS_MAX_STATION_NUM

Maximum number of stations

Found in: Component config > LWIP > DHCP server > CONFIG_LWIP_DHCPS

The maximum number of DHCP clients that are connected to the server. After this number is exceeded, DHCP server removes of the oldest device from it’s address pool, without notification.

Range:

  • from 1 to 64

Default value:

  • 8

CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP

Enable IPV4 Link-Local Addressing (AUTOIP)

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows the device to self-assign an address in the 169.256/16 range if none is assigned statically or via DHCP.

See RFC 3927.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP_TRIES

DHCP Probes before self-assigning IPv4 LL address

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP

DHCP client will send this many probes before self-assigning a link local address.

From LWIP help: “This can be set as low as 1 to get an AutoIP address very quickly, but you should be prepared to handle a changing IP address when DHCP overrides AutoIP.” (In the case of ESP-IDF, this means multiple SYSTEM_EVENT_STA_GOT_IP events.)

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP_MAX_CONFLICTS

Max IP conflicts before rate limiting

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP

If the AUTOIP functionality detects this many IP conflicts while self-assigning an address, it will go into a rate limited mode.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP_RATE_LIMIT_INTERVAL

Rate limited interval (seconds)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP

If rate limiting self-assignment requests, wait this long between each request.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6

Enable IPv6

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable IPv6 function. If not use IPv6 function, set this option to n. If disabling LWIP_IPV6 then some other components (coap and asio) will no longer be available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6_AUTOCONFIG

Enable IPV6 stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6

Enabling this option allows the devices to IPV6 stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC).

See RFC 4862.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6_NUM_ADDRESSES

Number of IPv6 addresses on each network interface

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6

The maximum number of IPv6 addresses on each interface. Any additional addresses will be discarded.

Default value:

  • 3

CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6_FORWARD

Enable IPv6 forwarding between interfaces

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6

Forwarding IPv6 packets between interfaces is only required when acting as a router.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6_RDNSS_MAX_DNS_SERVERS

Use IPv6 Router Advertisement Recursive DNS Server Option

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Use IPv6 Router Advertisement Recursive DNS Server Option (as per RFC 6106) to copy a defined maximum number of DNS servers to the DNS module. Set this option to a number of desired DNS servers advertised in the RA protocol. This feature is disabled when set to 0.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6_DHCP6

Enable DHCPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable DHCPv6 for IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration. Note that the dhcpv6 client has to be started using dhcp6_enable_stateless(netif); Note that the stateful address autoconfiguration is not supported.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_NETIF_STATUS_CALLBACK

Enable status callback for network interfaces

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable callbacks when the network interface is up/down and addresses are changed.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_NETIF_LOOPBACK

Support per-interface loopback

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option means that if a packet is sent with a destination address equal to the interface’s own IP address, it will “loop back” and be received by this interface. Disabling this option disables support of loopback interface in lwIP

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_LOOPBACK_MAX_PBUFS

Max queued loopback packets per interface

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_NETIF_LOOPBACK

Configure the maximum number of packets which can be queued for loopback on a given interface. Reducing this number may cause packets to be dropped, but will avoid filling memory with queued packet data.

Range:

  • from 0 to 16

Default value:

  • 8

TCP

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_MAX_ACTIVE_TCP

Maximum active TCP Connections

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

The maximum number of simultaneously active TCP connections. The practical maximum limit is determined by available heap memory at runtime.

Changing this value by itself does not substantially change the memory usage of LWIP, except for preventing new TCP connections after the limit is reached.

Range:

  • from 1 to 1024

Default value:

  • 16

CONFIG_LWIP_MAX_LISTENING_TCP

Maximum listening TCP Connections

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

The maximum number of simultaneously listening TCP connections. The practical maximum limit is determined by available heap memory at runtime.

Changing this value by itself does not substantially change the memory usage of LWIP, except for preventing new listening TCP connections after the limit is reached.

Range:

  • from 1 to 1024

Default value:

  • 16

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_HIGH_SPEED_RETRANSMISSION

TCP high speed retransmissions

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Speed up the TCP retransmission interval. If disabled, it is recommended to change the number of SYN retransmissions to 6, and TCP initial rto time to 3000.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_MAXRTX

Maximum number of retransmissions of data segments

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set maximum number of retransmissions of data segments.

Range:

  • from 3 to 12

Default value:

  • 12

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_SYNMAXRTX

Maximum number of retransmissions of SYN segments

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set maximum number of retransmissions of SYN segments.

Range:

  • from 3 to 12

Default value:

  • 6

  • 12

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_MSS

Maximum Segment Size (MSS)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set maximum segment size for TCP transmission.

Can be set lower to save RAM, the default value 1460(ipv4)/1440(ipv6) will give best throughput. IPv4 TCP_MSS Range: 576 <= TCP_MSS <= 1460 IPv6 TCP_MSS Range: 1220<= TCP_MSS <= 1440

Range:

  • from 536 to 1460

Default value:

  • 1440

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_TMR_INTERVAL

TCP timer interval(ms)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set TCP timer interval in milliseconds.

Can be used to speed connections on bad networks. A lower value will redeliver unacked packets faster.

Default value:

  • 250

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_MSL

Maximum segment lifetime (MSL)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set maximum segment lifetime in milliseconds.

Default value:

  • 60000

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_FIN_WAIT_TIMEOUT

Maximum FIN segment lifetime

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set maximum segment lifetime in milliseconds.

Default value:

  • 20000

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_SND_BUF_DEFAULT

Default send buffer size

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set default send buffer size for new TCP sockets.

Per-socket send buffer size can be changed at runtime with lwip_setsockopt(s, TCP_SNDBUF, …).

This value must be at least 2x the MSS size, and the default is 4x the default MSS size.

Setting a smaller default SNDBUF size can save some RAM, but will decrease performance.

Range:
Default value:

  • 5760

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_WND_DEFAULT

Default receive window size

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set default TCP receive window size for new TCP sockets.

Per-socket receive window size can be changed at runtime with lwip_setsockopt(s, TCP_WINDOW, …).

Setting a smaller default receive window size can save some RAM, but will significantly decrease performance.

Range:
Default value:

  • 5760

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_RECVMBOX_SIZE

Default TCP receive mail box size

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set TCP receive mail box size. Generally bigger value means higher throughput but more memory. The recommended value is: LWIP_TCP_WND_DEFAULT/TCP_MSS + 2, e.g. if LWIP_TCP_WND_DEFAULT=14360, TCP_MSS=1436, then the recommended receive mail box size is (14360/1436 + 2) = 12.

TCP receive mail box is a per socket mail box, when the application receives packets from TCP socket, LWIP core firstly posts the packets to TCP receive mail box and the application then fetches the packets from mail box. It means LWIP can caches maximum LWIP_TCP_RECCVMBOX_SIZE packets for each TCP socket, so the maximum possible cached TCP packets for all TCP sockets is LWIP_TCP_RECCVMBOX_SIZE multiples the maximum TCP socket number. In other words, the bigger LWIP_TCP_RECVMBOX_SIZE means more memory. On the other hand, if the receiv mail box is too small, the mail box may be full. If the mail box is full, the LWIP drops the packets. So generally we need to make sure the TCP receive mail box is big enough to avoid packet drop between LWIP core and application.

Range:
Default value:

  • 6

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_QUEUE_OOSEQ

Queue incoming out-of-order segments

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Queue incoming out-of-order segments for later use.

Disable this option to save some RAM during TCP sessions, at the expense of increased retransmissions if segments arrive out of order.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_OOSEQ_TIMEOUT

Timeout for each pbuf queued in TCP OOSEQ, in RTOs.

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP > CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_QUEUE_OOSEQ

The timeout value is TCP_OOSEQ_TIMEOUT * RTO.

Range:

  • from 1 to 30

Default value:

  • 6

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_OOSEQ_MAX_PBUFS

The maximum number of pbufs queued on OOSEQ per pcb

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP > CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_QUEUE_OOSEQ

If LWIP_TCP_OOSEQ_MAX_PBUFS = 0, TCP will not control the number of OOSEQ pbufs.

In a poor network environment, many out-of-order tcp pbufs will be received. These out-of-order pbufs will be cached in the TCP out-of-order queue which will cause Wi-Fi/Ethernet fail to release RX buffer in time. It is possible that all RX buffers for MAC layer are used by OOSEQ.

Control the number of out-of-order pbufs to ensure that the MAC layer has enough RX buffer to receive packets.

In the Wi-Fi scenario,recommended OOSEQ PBUFS Range: 0 <= TCP_OOSEQ_MAX_PBUFS <= CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_DYNAMIC_RX_BUFFER_NUM/(MAX_TCP_NUMBER + 1)

In the Ethernet scenario,recommended Ethernet OOSEQ PBUFS Range: 0 <= TCP_OOSEQ_MAX_PBUFS <= CONFIG_ETH_DMA_RX_BUFFER_NUM/(MAX_TCP_NUMBER + 1)

Within the recommended value range, the larger the value, the better the performance.

MAX_TCP_NUMBER represent Maximum number of TCP connections in Wi-Fi(STA+SoftAP) and Ethernet scenario.

Range:

  • from 0 to 12

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_SACK_OUT

Support sending selective acknowledgements

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP > CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_QUEUE_OOSEQ

TCP will support sending selective acknowledgements (SACKs).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_OVERSIZE

Pre-allocate transmit PBUF size

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Allows enabling “oversize” allocation of TCP transmission pbufs ahead of time, which can reduce the length of pbuf chains used for transmission.

This will not make a difference to sockets where Nagle’s algorithm is disabled.

Default value of MSS is fine for most applications, 25% MSS may save some RAM when only transmitting small amounts of data. Disabled will have worst performance and fragmentation characteristics, but uses least RAM overall.

Available options:

  • MSS (LWIP_TCP_OVERSIZE_MSS)

  • 25% MSS (LWIP_TCP_OVERSIZE_QUARTER_MSS)

  • Disabled (LWIP_TCP_OVERSIZE_DISABLE)

CONFIG_LWIP_WND_SCALE

Support TCP window scale

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Enable this feature to support TCP window scaling.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_RCV_SCALE

Set TCP receiving window scaling factor

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP > CONFIG_LWIP_WND_SCALE

Enable this feature to support TCP window scaling.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_RTO_TIME

Default TCP rto time

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set default TCP rto time for a reasonable initial rto. In bad network environment, recommend set value of rto time to 1500.

Default value:

  • 3000

  • 1500

UDP

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_MAX_UDP_PCBS

Maximum active UDP control blocks

Found in: Component config > LWIP > UDP

The maximum number of active UDP “connections” (ie UDP sockets sending/receiving data). The practical maximum limit is determined by available heap memory at runtime.

Range:

  • from 1 to 1024

Default value:

  • 16

CONFIG_LWIP_UDP_RECVMBOX_SIZE

Default UDP receive mail box size

Found in: Component config > LWIP > UDP

Set UDP receive mail box size. The recommended value is 6.

UDP receive mail box is a per socket mail box, when the application receives packets from UDP socket, LWIP core firstly posts the packets to UDP receive mail box and the application then fetches the packets from mail box. It means LWIP can caches maximum UDP_RECCVMBOX_SIZE packets for each UDP socket, so the maximum possible cached UDP packets for all UDP sockets is UDP_RECCVMBOX_SIZE multiples the maximum UDP socket number. In other words, the bigger UDP_RECVMBOX_SIZE means more memory. On the other hand, if the receiv mail box is too small, the mail box may be full. If the mail box is full, the LWIP drops the packets. So generally we need to make sure the UDP receive mail box is big enough to avoid packet drop between LWIP core and application.

Range:

  • from 6 to 64

Default value:

  • 6

Checksums

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_CHECKSUM_CHECK_IP

Enable LWIP IP checksums

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Checksums

Enable checksum checking for received IP messages

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_CHECKSUM_CHECK_UDP

Enable LWIP UDP checksums

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Checksums

Enable checksum checking for received UDP messages

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_CHECKSUM_CHECK_ICMP

Enable LWIP ICMP checksums

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Checksums

Enable checksum checking for received ICMP messages

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_STACK_SIZE

TCP/IP Task Stack Size

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Configure TCP/IP task stack size, used by LWIP to process multi-threaded TCP/IP operations. Setting this stack too small will result in stack overflow crashes.

Range:

  • from 2048 to 65536

Default value:

  • 3072

CONFIG_LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_AFFINITY

TCP/IP task affinity

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Allows setting LwIP tasks affinity, i.e. whether the task is pinned to CPU0, pinned to CPU1, or allowed to run on any CPU. Currently this applies to “TCP/IP” task and “Ping” task.

Available options:

  • No affinity (LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_AFFINITY_NO_AFFINITY)

  • CPU0 (LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_AFFINITY_CPU0)

  • CPU1 (LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_AFFINITY_CPU1)

CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_SUPPORT

Enable PPP support (new/experimental)

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable PPP stack. Now only PPP over serial is possible.

PPP over serial support is experimental and unsupported.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_ENABLE_IPV6

Enable IPV6 support for PPP connections (IPV6CP)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_SUPPORT

Enable IPV6 support in PPP for the local link between the DTE (processor) and DCE (modem). There are some modems which do not support the IPV6 addressing in the local link. If they are requested for IPV6CP negotiation, they may time out. This would in turn fail the configuration for the whole link. If your modem is not responding correctly to PPP Phase Network, try to disable IPV6 support.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6_MEMP_NUM_ND6_QUEUE

Max number of IPv6 packets to queue during MAC resolution

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Config max number of IPv6 packets to queue during MAC resolution.

Range:

  • from 3 to 20

Default value:

  • 3

CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6_ND6_NUM_NEIGHBORS

Max number of entries in IPv6 neighbor cache

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Config max number of entries in IPv6 neighbor cache

Range:

  • from 3 to 10

Default value:

  • 5

CONFIG_LWIP_ND6

LWIP NDP6 Enable/Disable

Found in: Component config > LWIP

This option is used to disable the Network Discovery Protocol (NDP) if it is not required. Please use this option with caution, as the NDP is essential for IPv6 functionality within a local network.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_FORCE_ROUTER_FORWARDING

LWIP Force Router Forwarding Enable/Disable

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_ND6

This option is used to set the the router flag for the NA packets. When enabled, the router flag in NA packet will always set to 1, otherwise, never set router flag for NA packets.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_NOTIFY_PHASE_SUPPORT

Enable Notify Phase Callback

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable to set a callback which is called on change of the internal PPP state machine.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_PAP_SUPPORT

Enable PAP support

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) support

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_CHAP_SUPPORT

Enable CHAP support

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) support

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_MSCHAP_SUPPORT

Enable MSCHAP support

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable Microsoft version of the Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (MSCHAP) support

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_MPPE_SUPPORT

Enable MPPE support

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption (MPPE) support

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_ENABLE_LCP_ECHO

Enable LCP ECHO

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable LCP echo keepalive requests

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_LCP_ECHOINTERVAL

Echo interval (s)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_ENABLE_LCP_ECHO

Interval in seconds between keepalive LCP echo requests, 0 to disable.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_LCP_MAXECHOFAILS

Maximum echo failures

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_ENABLE_LCP_ECHO

Number of consecutive unanswered echo requests before failure is indicated.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_DEBUG_ON

Enable PPP debug log output

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable PPP debug log output

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_SLIP_SUPPORT

Enable SLIP support (new/experimental)

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable SLIP stack. Now only SLIP over serial is possible.

SLIP over serial support is experimental and unsupported.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_SLIP_DEBUG_ON

Enable SLIP debug log output

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_SLIP_SUPPORT

Enable SLIP debug log output

Default value:
ICMP

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_ICMP

ICMP: Enable ICMP

Found in: Component config > LWIP > ICMP

Enable ICMP module for check network stability

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_MULTICAST_PING

Respond to multicast pings

Found in: Component config > LWIP > ICMP

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_BROADCAST_PING

Respond to broadcast pings

Found in: Component config > LWIP > ICMP

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

LWIP RAW API

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_MAX_RAW_PCBS

Maximum LWIP RAW PCBs

Found in: Component config > LWIP > LWIP RAW API

The maximum number of simultaneously active LWIP RAW protocol control blocks. The practical maximum limit is determined by available heap memory at runtime.

Range:

  • from 1 to 1024

Default value:

  • 16

SNTP

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_SNTP_MAX_SERVERS

Maximum number of NTP servers

Found in: Component config > LWIP > SNTP

Set maximum number of NTP servers used by LwIP SNTP module. First argument of sntp_setserver/sntp_setservername functions is limited to this value.

Range:

  • from 1 to 16

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_GET_NTP_SRV

Request NTP servers from DHCP

Found in: Component config > LWIP > SNTP

If enabled, LWIP will add ‘NTP’ to Parameter-Request Option sent via DHCP-request. DHCP server might reply with an NTP server address in option 42. SNTP callback for such replies should be set accordingly (see sntp_servermode_dhcp() func.)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_MAX_NTP_SERVERS

Maximum number of NTP servers aquired via DHCP

Found in: Component config > LWIP > SNTP > CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_GET_NTP_SRV

Set maximum number of NTP servers aquired via DHCP-offer. Should be less or equal to “Maximum number of NTP servers”, any extra servers would be just ignored.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_SNTP_UPDATE_DELAY

Request interval to update time (ms)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > SNTP

This option allows you to set the time update period via SNTP. Default is 1 hour. Must not be below 15 seconds by specification. (SNTPv4 RFC 4330 enforces a minimum update time of 15 seconds).

Range:

  • from 15000 to 4294967295

Default value:

  • 3600000

CONFIG_LWIP_BRIDGEIF_MAX_PORTS

Maximum number of bridge ports

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Set maximum number of ports a bridge can consists of.

Range:

  • from 1 to 63

Default value:

  • 7

DNS

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_DNS_MAX_SERVERS

Maximum number of DNS servers

Found in: Component config > LWIP > DNS

Set maximum number of DNS servers. If fallback DNS servers are supported, the number of DNS servers needs to be greater than or equal to 3.

Range:

  • from 1 to 4

Default value:

  • 3

CONFIG_LWIP_FALLBACK_DNS_SERVER_SUPPORT

Enable DNS fallback server support

Found in: Component config > LWIP > DNS

Enable this feature to support DNS fallback server.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_FALLBACK_DNS_SERVER_ADDRESS

DNS fallback server address

Found in: Component config > LWIP > DNS > CONFIG_LWIP_FALLBACK_DNS_SERVER_SUPPORT

This option allows you to config dns fallback server address.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_ESP_LWIP_ASSERT

Enable LWIP ASSERT checks

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable this option keeps LWIP assertion checks enabled. It is recommended to keep this option enabled.

If asserts are disabled for the entire project, they are also disabled for LWIP and this option is ignored.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_ASSERTIONS_DISABLE

Hooks

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN

TCP ISN Hook

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Hooks

Enables to define a TCP ISN hook to randomize initial sequence number in TCP connection. The default TCP ISN algorithm used in IDF (standardized in RFC 6528) produces ISN by combining an MD5 of the new TCP id and a stable secret with the current time. This is because the lwIP implementation (tcp_next_iss) is not very strong, as it does not take into consideration any platform specific entropy source.

Set to LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN_CUSTOM to provide custom implementation. Set to LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN_NONE to use lwIP implementation.

Available options:

  • No hook declared (LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN_NONE)

  • Default implementation (LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN_DEFAULT)

  • Custom implementation (LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN_CUSTOM)

CONFIG_LWIP_HOOK_IP6_ROUTE

IPv6 route Hook

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Hooks

Enables custom IPv6 route hook. Setting this to “default” provides weak implementation stub that could be overwritten in application code. Setting this to “custom” provides hook’s declaration only and expects the application to implement it.

Available options:

  • No hook declared (LWIP_HOOK_IP6_ROUTE_NONE)

  • Default (weak) implementation (LWIP_HOOK_IP6_ROUTE_DEFAULT)

  • Custom implementation (LWIP_HOOK_IP6_ROUTE_CUSTOM)

CONFIG_LWIP_HOOK_ND6_GET_GW

IPv6 get gateway Hook

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Hooks

Enables custom IPv6 route hook. Setting this to “default” provides weak implementation stub that could be overwritten in application code. Setting this to “custom” provides hook’s declaration only and expects the application to implement it.

Available options:

  • No hook declared (LWIP_HOOK_ND6_GET_GW_NONE)

  • Default (weak) implementation (LWIP_HOOK_ND6_GET_GW_DEFAULT)

  • Custom implementation (LWIP_HOOK_ND6_GET_GW_CUSTOM)

CONFIG_LWIP_HOOK_NETCONN_EXTERNAL_RESOLVE

Netconn external resolve Hook

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Hooks

Enables custom DNS resolve hook. Setting this to “default” provides weak implementation stub that could be overwritten in application code. Setting this to “custom” provides hook’s declaration only and expects the application to implement it.

Available options:

  • No hook declared (LWIP_HOOK_NETCONN_EXT_RESOLVE_NONE)

  • Default (weak) implementation (LWIP_HOOK_NETCONN_EXT_RESOLVE_DEFAULT)

  • Custom implementation (LWIP_HOOK_NETCONN_EXT_RESOLVE_CUSTOM)

CONFIG_LWIP_HOOK_IP6_INPUT

IPv6 packet input

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Hooks

Enables custom IPv6 packet input. Setting this to “default” provides weak implementation stub that could be overwritten in application code. Setting this to “custom” provides hook’s declaration only and expects the application to implement it.

Available options:

  • No hook declared (LWIP_HOOK_IP6_INPUT_NONE)

  • Default (weak) implementation (LWIP_HOOK_IP6_INPUT_DEFAULT)

  • Custom implementation (LWIP_HOOK_IP6_INPUT_CUSTOM)

CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Enable LWIP Debug

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows different kinds of lwIP debug output.

All lwIP debug features increase the size of the final binary.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG_ESP_LOG

Route LWIP debugs through ESP_LOG interface

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Enabling this option routes all enabled LWIP debugs through ESP_LOGD.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_NETIF_DEBUG

Enable netif debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PBUF_DEBUG

Enable pbuf debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_ETHARP_DEBUG

Enable etharp debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_API_LIB_DEBUG

Enable api lib debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_SOCKETS_DEBUG

Enable socket debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_IP_DEBUG

Enable IP debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_ICMP_DEBUG

Enable ICMP debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_STATE_DEBUG

Enable DHCP state tracking

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_DEBUG

Enable DHCP debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_IP6_DEBUG

Enable IP6 debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_ICMP6_DEBUG

Enable ICMP6 debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_DEBUG

Enable TCP debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_SNTP_DEBUG

Enable SNTP debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_DNS_DEBUG

Enable DNS debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_BRIDGEIF_DEBUG

Enable bridge generic debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_BRIDGEIF_FDB_DEBUG

Enable bridge FDB debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_BRIDGEIF_FW_DEBUG

Enable bridge forwarding debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:

mbedTLS

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_MEM_ALLOC_MODE

Memory allocation strategy

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Allocation strategy for mbedTLS, essentially provides ability to allocate all required dynamic allocations from,

  • Internal DRAM memory only

  • External SPIRAM memory only

  • Either internal or external memory based on default malloc() behavior in ESP-IDF

  • Custom allocation mode, by overwriting calloc()/free() using mbedtls_platform_set_calloc_free() function

  • Internal IRAM memory wherever applicable else internal DRAM

Recommended mode here is always internal (*), since that is most preferred from security perspective. But if application requirement does not allow sufficient free internal memory then alternate mode can be selected.

(*) In case of ESP32-S2/ESP32-S3, hardware allows encryption of external SPIRAM contents provided hardware flash encryption feature is enabled. In that case, using external SPIRAM allocation strategy is also safe choice from security perspective.

Available options:

  • Internal memory (MBEDTLS_INTERNAL_MEM_ALLOC)

  • External SPIRAM (MBEDTLS_EXTERNAL_MEM_ALLOC)

  • Default alloc mode (MBEDTLS_DEFAULT_MEM_ALLOC)

  • Custom alloc mode (MBEDTLS_CUSTOM_MEM_ALLOC)

  • Internal IRAM (MBEDTLS_IRAM_8BIT_MEM_ALLOC)

    Allows to use IRAM memory region as 8bit accessible region.

    TLS input and output buffers will be allocated in IRAM section which is 32bit aligned memory. Every unaligned (8bit or 16bit) access will result in an exception and incur penalty of certain clock cycles per unaligned read/write.

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_CONTENT_LEN

TLS maximum message content length

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Maximum TLS message length (in bytes) supported by mbedTLS.

16384 is the default and this value is required to comply fully with TLS standards.

However you can set a lower value in order to save RAM. This is safe if the other end of the connection supports Maximum Fragment Length Negotiation Extension (max_fragment_length, see RFC6066) or you know for certain that it will never send a message longer than a certain number of bytes.

If the value is set too low, symptoms are a failed TLS handshake or a return value of MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_RECORD (-0x7200).

Range:

  • from 512 to 16384

Default value:

  • 16384

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ASYMMETRIC_CONTENT_LEN

Asymmetric in/out fragment length

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

If enabled, this option allows customizing TLS in/out fragment length in asymmetric way. Please note that enabling this with default values saves 12KB of dynamic memory per TLS connection.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN

TLS maximum incoming fragment length

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ASYMMETRIC_CONTENT_LEN

This defines maximum incoming fragment length, overriding default maximum content length (MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_CONTENT_LEN).

Range:

  • from 512 to 16384

Default value:

  • 16384

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN

TLS maximum outgoing fragment length

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ASYMMETRIC_CONTENT_LEN

This defines maximum outgoing fragment length, overriding default maximum content length (MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_CONTENT_LEN).

Range:

  • from 512 to 16384

Default value:

  • 4096

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_BUFFER

Using dynamic TX/RX buffer

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Using dynamic TX/RX buffer. After enabling this option, mbedTLS will allocate TX buffer when need to send data and then free it if all data is sent, allocate RX buffer when need to receive data and then free it when all data is used or read by upper layer.

By default, when SSL is initialized, mbedTLS also allocate TX and RX buffer with the default value of “MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN” or “MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN”, so to save more heap, users can set the options to be an appropriate value.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_FREE_CONFIG_DATA

Free private key and DHM data after its usage

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_BUFFER

Free private key and DHM data after its usage in handshake process.

The option will decrease heap cost when handshake, but also lead to problem:

Becasue all certificate, private key and DHM data are freed so users should register certificate and private key to ssl config object again.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_FREE_CA_CERT

Free SSL CA certificate after its usage

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_BUFFER > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_FREE_CONFIG_DATA

Free CA certificate after its usage in the handshake process. This option will decrease the heap footprint for the TLS handshake, but may lead to a problem: If the respective ssl object needs to perform the TLS handshake again, the CA certificate should once again be registered to the ssl object.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DEBUG

Enable mbedTLS debugging

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable mbedTLS debugging functions at compile time.

If this option is enabled, you can include “mbedtls/esp_debug.h” and call mbedtls_esp_enable_debug_log() at runtime in order to enable mbedTLS debug output via the ESP log mechanism.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL

Set mbedTLS debugging level

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DEBUG

Set mbedTLS debugging level

Available options:

  • Warning (MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL_WARN)

  • Info (MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug (MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • Verbose (MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

Certificate Bundle

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Enable trusted root certificate bundle

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificate Bundle

Enable support for large number of default root certificates

When enabled this option allows user to store default as well as customer specific root certificates in compressed format rather than storing full certificate. For the root certificates the public key and the subject name will be stored.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DEFAULT_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Default certificate bundle options

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificate Bundle > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Available options:

  • Use the full default certificate bundle (MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE_DEFAULT_FULL)

  • Use only the most common certificates from the default bundles (MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE_DEFAULT_CMN)

    Use only the most common certificates from the default bundles, reducing the size with 50%, while still having around 99% coverage.

  • Do not use the default certificate bundle (MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE_DEFAULT_NONE)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CUSTOM_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Add custom certificates to the default bundle

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificate Bundle > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CUSTOM_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE_PATH

Custom certificate bundle path

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificate Bundle > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CUSTOM_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Name of the custom certificate directory or file. This path is evaluated relative to the project root directory.

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE_MAX_CERTS

Maximum no of certificates allowed in certificate bundle

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificate Bundle > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Default value:

  • 200

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_RESTARTABLE

Enable mbedTLS ecp restartable

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable “non-blocking” ECC operations that can return early and be resumed.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CMAC_C

Enable CMAC mode for block ciphers

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable the CMAC (Cipher-based Message Authentication Code) mode for block ciphers.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_AES

Enable hardware AES acceleration

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable hardware accelerated AES encryption & decryption.

Note that if the ESP32 CPU is running at 240MHz, hardware AES does not offer any speed boost over software AES.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_DUPLDST

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_GCM

Enable partially hardware accelerated GCM

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_AES

Enable partially hardware accelerated GCM. GHASH calculation is still done in software.

If MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_GCM is disabled and MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_AES is enabled then mbedTLS will still use the hardware accelerated AES block operation, but on a single block at a time.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_GCM_SUPPORT_NON_AES_CIPHER

Enable support for non-AES ciphers in GCM operation

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_AES

Enable this config to support fallback to software definitions for a non-AES cipher GCM operation as we support hardware acceleration only for AES cipher. Some of the non-AES ciphers used in a GCM operation are DES, ARIA, CAMELLIA, CHACHA20, BLOWFISH.

If this config is disabled, performing a non-AES cipher GCM operation with the config MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_AES enabled will result in calculation of an AES-GCM operation instead for the given input values and thus could lead to failure in certificate validation which would ultimately lead to a SSL handshake failure.

This config being by-default enabled leads to an increase in binary size footprint of ~2.5KB. In case you are sure that your use case (for example, client and server configurations in case of a TLS handshake) would not involve any GCM operations using a non-AES cipher, you can safely disable this config, leading to reduction in binary size footprint.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_MPI

Enable hardware MPI (bignum) acceleration

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable hardware accelerated multiple precision integer operations.

Hardware accelerated multiplication, modulo multiplication, and modular exponentiation for up to SOC_RSA_MAX_BIT_LEN bit results.

These operations are used by RSA.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_DUPLDST

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_SHA

Enable hardware SHA acceleration

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable hardware accelerated SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 & SHA512 in mbedTLS.

Due to a hardware limitation, on the ESP32 hardware acceleration is only guaranteed if SHA digests are calculated one at a time. If more than one SHA digest is calculated at the same time, one will be calculated fully in hardware and the rest will be calculated (at least partially calculated) in software. This happens automatically.

SHA hardware acceleration is faster than software in some situations but slower in others. You should benchmark to find the best setting for you.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_DUPLDST

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_ECC

Enable hardware ECC acceleration

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable hardware accelerated ECC point multiplication and point verification for points on curve SECP192R1 and SECP256R1 in mbedTLS

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SOC_ECC_SUPPORTED

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECC_OTHER_CURVES_SOFT_FALLBACK

Fallback to software implementation for curves not supported in hardware

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_ECC

Fallback to software implementation of ECC point multiplication and point verification for curves not supported in hardware.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ROM_MD5

Use MD5 implementation in ROM

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Use ROM MD5 in mbedTLS.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ATCA_HW_ECDSA_SIGN

Enable hardware ECDSA sign acceleration when using ATECC608A

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

This option enables hardware acceleration for ECDSA sign function, only when using ATECC608A cryptoauth chip (integrated with ESP32-WROOM-32SE)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ATCA_HW_ECDSA_VERIFY

Enable hardware ECDSA verify acceleration when using ATECC608A

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

This option enables hardware acceleration for ECDSA sign function, only when using ATECC608A cryptoauth chip (integrated with ESP32-WROOM-32SE)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME

Enable mbedtls time support

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable use of time.h functions (time() and gmtime()) by mbedTLS.

This option doesn’t require the system time to be correct, but enables functionality that requires relative timekeeping - for example periodic expiry of TLS session tickets or session cache entries.

Disabling this option will save some firmware size, particularly if the rest of the firmware doesn’t call any standard timekeeeping functions.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PLATFORM_TIME_ALT

Enable mbedtls time support: platform-specific

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME

Enabling this config will provide users with a function “mbedtls_platform_set_time()” that allows to set an alternative time function pointer.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME_DATE

Enable mbedtls certificate expiry check

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME

Enables X.509 certificate expiry checks in mbedTLS.

If this option is disabled (default) then X.509 certificate “valid from” and “valid to” timestamp fields are ignored.

If this option is enabled, these fields are compared with the current system date and time. The time is retrieved using the standard time() and gmtime() functions. If the certificate is not valid for the current system time then verification will fail with code MBEDTLS_X509_BADCERT_FUTURE or MBEDTLS_X509_BADCERT_EXPIRED.

Enabling this option requires adding functionality in the firmware to set the system clock to a valid timestamp before using TLS. The recommended way to do this is via ESP-IDF’s SNTP functionality, but any method can be used.

In the case where only a small number of certificates are trusted by the device, please carefully consider the tradeoffs of enabling this option. There may be undesired consequences, for example if all trusted certificates expire while the device is offline and a TLS connection is required to update. Or if an issue with the SNTP server means that the system time is invalid for an extended period after a reset.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECDSA_DETERMINISTIC

Enable deterministic ECDSA

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Standard ECDSA is “fragile” in the sense that lack of entropy when signing may result in a compromise of the long-term signing key.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SHA512_C

Enable the SHA-384 and SHA-512 cryptographic hash algorithms

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable MBEDTLS_SHA512_C adds support for SHA-384 and SHA-512.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SHA3_C

Enable the SHA3 cryptographic hash algorithm

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enabling MBEDTLS_SHA3_C adds support for SHA3. Enabling this configuration option increases the flash footprint by almost 4KB.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_TLS_MODE

TLS Protocol Role

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

mbedTLS can be compiled with protocol support for the TLS server, TLS client, or both server and client.

Reducing the number of TLS roles supported saves code size.

Available options:

  • Server & Client (MBEDTLS_TLS_SERVER_AND_CLIENT)

  • Server (MBEDTLS_TLS_SERVER_ONLY)

  • Client (MBEDTLS_TLS_CLIENT_ONLY)

  • None (MBEDTLS_TLS_DISABLED)

TLS Key Exchange Methods

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PSK_MODES

Enable pre-shared-key ciphersuites

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods

Enable to show configuration for different types of pre-shared-key TLS authentatication methods.

Leaving this options disabled will save code size if they are not used.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_PSK

Enable PSK based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PSK_MODES

Enable to support symmetric key PSK (pre-shared-key) TLS key exchange modes.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_DHE_PSK

Enable DHE-PSK based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PSK_MODES

Enable to support Diffie-Hellman PSK (pre-shared-key) TLS authentication modes.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_PSK

Enable ECDHE-PSK based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PSK_MODES

Enable to support Elliptic-Curve-Diffie-Hellman PSK (pre-shared-key) TLS authentication modes.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_RSA_PSK

Enable RSA-PSK based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PSK_MODES

Enable to support RSA PSK (pre-shared-key) TLS authentication modes.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_RSA

Enable RSA-only based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_DHE_RSA

Enable DHE-RSA based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-DHE-RSA-WITH-

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ELLIPTIC_CURVE

Support Elliptic Curve based ciphersuites

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods

Enable to show Elliptic Curve based ciphersuite mode options.

Disabling all Elliptic Curve ciphersuites saves code size and can give slightly faster TLS handshakes, provided the server supports RSA-only ciphersuite modes.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_RSA

Enable ECDHE-RSA based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ELLIPTIC_CURVE

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-ECDHE-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_ECDSA

Enable ECDHE-ECDSA based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ELLIPTIC_CURVE

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-ECDHE-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDH_ECDSA

Enable ECDH-ECDSA based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ELLIPTIC_CURVE

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-ECDHE-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDH_RSA

Enable ECDH-RSA based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ELLIPTIC_CURVE

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-ECDHE-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE

Enable ECJPAKE based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-ECJPAKE-WITH-

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION

Support TLS renegotiation

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

The two main uses of renegotiation are (1) refresh keys on long-lived connections and (2) client authentication after the initial handshake. If you don’t need renegotiation, disabling it will save code size and reduce the possibility of abuse/vulnerability.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2

Support TLS 1.2 protocol

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_GMTSSL1_1

Support GM/T SSL 1.1 protocol

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Provisions for GM/T SSL 1.1 support

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS

Support DTLS protocol (all versions)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Requires TLS 1.2 to be enabled for DTLS 1.2

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN

Support ALPN (Application Layer Protocol Negotiation)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Disabling this option will save some code size if it is not needed.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CLIENT_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS

TLS: Client Support for RFC 5077 SSL session tickets

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Client support for RFC 5077 session tickets. See mbedTLS documentation for more details. Disabling this option will save some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SERVER_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS

TLS: Server Support for RFC 5077 SSL session tickets

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Server support for RFC 5077 session tickets. See mbedTLS documentation for more details. Disabling this option will save some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Symmetric Ciphers

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_AES_C

AES block cipher

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CAMELLIA_C

Camellia block cipher

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DES_C

DES block cipher (legacy, insecure)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enables the DES block cipher to support 3DES-based TLS ciphersuites.

3DES is vulnerable to the Sweet32 attack and should only be enabled if absolutely necessary.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_BLOWFISH_C

Blowfish block cipher (read help)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enables the Blowfish block cipher (not used for TLS sessions.)

The Blowfish cipher is not used for mbedTLS TLS sessions but can be used for other purposes. Read up on the limitations of Blowfish (including Sweet32) before enabling.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_XTEA_C

XTEA block cipher

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enables the XTEA block cipher.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CCM_C

CCM (Counter with CBC-MAC) block cipher modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enable Counter with CBC-MAC (CCM) modes for AES and/or Camellia ciphers.

Disabling this option saves some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_GCM_C

GCM (Galois/Counter) block cipher modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enable Galois/Counter Mode for AES and/or Camellia ciphers.

This option is generally faster than CCM.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_NIST_KW_C

NIST key wrapping (KW) and KW padding (KWP)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enable NIST key wrapping and key wrapping padding.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_RIPEMD160_C

Enable RIPEMD-160 hash algorithm

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable the RIPEMD-160 hash algorithm.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Certificates

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PEM_PARSE_C

Read & Parse PEM formatted certificates

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificates

Enable decoding/parsing of PEM formatted certificates.

If your certificates are all in the simpler DER format, disabling this option will save some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PEM_WRITE_C

Write PEM formatted certificates

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificates

Enable writing of PEM formatted certificates.

If writing certificate data only in DER format, disabling this option will save some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_X509_CRL_PARSE_C

X.509 CRL parsing

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificates

Support for parsing X.509 Certifificate Revocation Lists.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_X509_CSR_PARSE_C

X.509 CSR parsing

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificates

Support for parsing X.509 Certifificate Signing Requests

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Elliptic Curve Ciphers

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DHM_C

Diffie-Hellman-Merkle key exchange (DHM)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable DHM. Needed to use DHE-xxx TLS ciphersuites.

Note that the security of Diffie-Hellman key exchanges depends on a suitable prime being used for the exchange. Please see detailed warning text about this in file mbedtls/dhm.h file.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECDH_C

Elliptic Curve Diffie-Hellman (ECDH)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable ECDH. Needed to use ECDHE-xxx TLS ciphersuites.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECDSA_C

Elliptic Curve DSA

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECDH_C

Enable ECDSA. Needed to use ECDSA-xxx TLS ciphersuites.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECJPAKE_C

Elliptic curve J-PAKE

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable ECJPAKE. Needed to use ECJPAKE-xxx TLS ciphersuites.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP192R1_ENABLED

Enable SECP192R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for SECP192R1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP224R1_ENABLED

Enable SECP224R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for SECP224R1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP256R1_ENABLED

Enable SECP256R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for SECP256R1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP384R1_ENABLED

Enable SECP384R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for SECP384R1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP521R1_ENABLED

Enable SECP521R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for SECP521R1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP192K1_ENABLED

Enable SECP192K1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for SECP192K1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP224K1_ENABLED

Enable SECP224K1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for SECP224K1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP256K1_ENABLED

Enable SECP256K1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for SECP256K1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_BP256R1_ENABLED

Enable BP256R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

support for DP Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_BP384R1_ENABLED

Enable BP384R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

support for DP Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_BP512R1_ENABLED

Enable BP512R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

support for DP Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_CURVE25519_ENABLED

Enable CURVE25519 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for CURVE25519 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_NIST_OPTIM

NIST ‘modulo p’ optimisations

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

NIST ‘modulo p’ optimisations increase Elliptic Curve operation performance.

Disabling this option saves some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_FIXED_POINT_OPTIM

Enable fixed-point multiplication optimisations

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

This configuration option enables optimizations to speedup (about 3 ~ 4 times) the ECP fixed point multiplication using pre-computed tables in the flash memory. Enabling this configuration option increases the flash footprint (about 29KB if all Elliptic Curve selected) in the application binary.

# end of Elliptic Curve options

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_POLY1305_C

Poly1305 MAC algorithm

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for Poly1305 MAC algorithm.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CHACHA20_C

Chacha20 stream cipher

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for Chacha20 stream cipher.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CHACHAPOLY_C

ChaCha20-Poly1305 AEAD algorithm

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CHACHA20_C

Enable support for ChaCha20-Poly1305 AEAD algorithm.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HKDF_C

HKDF algorithm (RFC 5869)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for the Hashed Message Authentication Code (HMAC)-based key derivation function (HKDF).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_THREADING_C

Enable the threading abstraction layer

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

If you do intend to use contexts between threads, you will need to enable this layer to prevent race conditions.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_THREADING_ALT

Enable threading alternate implementation

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_THREADING_C

Enable threading alt to allow your own alternate threading implementation.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_THREADING_PTHREAD

Enable threading pthread implementation

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_THREADING_C

Enable the pthread wrapper layer for the threading layer.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_LARGE_KEY_SOFTWARE_MPI

Fallback to software implementation for larger MPI values

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Fallback to software implementation for RSA key lengths larger than SOC_RSA_MAX_BIT_LEN. If this is not active then the ESP will be unable to process keys greater than SOC_RSA_MAX_BIT_LEN.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_USE_CRYPTO_ROM_IMPL

Use ROM implementation of the crypto algorithm

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable this flag to use mbedtls crypto algorithm from ROM instead of ESP-IDF.

This configuration option saves flash footprint in the application binary. Note that the version of mbedtls crypto algorithm library in ROM(ECO1~ECO3) is v2.16.12, and the version of mbedtls crypto algorithm library in ROM(ECO4) is v3.6.0. We have done the security analysis of the mbedtls revision in ROM (ECO1~ECO4) and ensured that affected symbols have been patched (removed). If in the future mbedtls revisions there are security issues that also affects the version in ROM (ECO1~ECO4) then we shall patch the relevant symbols. This would increase the flash footprint and hence care must be taken to keep some reserved space for the application binary in flash layout.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if ESP_ROM_HAS_MBEDTLS_CRYPTO_LIB

ESP-MQTT Configurations

Contains:

CONFIG_MQTT_PROTOCOL_311

Enable MQTT protocol 3.1.1

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

If not, this library will use MQTT protocol 3.1

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_PROTOCOL_5

Enable MQTT protocol 5.0

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

If not, this library will not support MQTT 5.0

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_TRANSPORT_SSL

Enable MQTT over SSL

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Enable MQTT transport over SSL with mbedtls

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_TRANSPORT_WEBSOCKET

Enable MQTT over Websocket

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Enable MQTT transport over Websocket.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_TRANSPORT_WEBSOCKET_SECURE

Enable MQTT over Websocket Secure

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_TRANSPORT_WEBSOCKET

Enable MQTT transport over Websocket Secure.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_MSG_ID_INCREMENTAL

Use Incremental Message Id

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Set this to true for the message id (2.3.1 Packet Identifier) to be generated as an incremental number rather then a random value (used by default)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_SKIP_PUBLISH_IF_DISCONNECTED

Skip publish if disconnected

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Set this to true to avoid publishing (enqueueing messages) if the client is disconnected. The MQTT client tries to publish all messages by default, even in the disconnected state (where the qos1 and qos2 packets are stored in the internal outbox to be published later) The MQTT_SKIP_PUBLISH_IF_DISCONNECTED option allows applications to override this behaviour and not enqueue publish packets in the disconnected state.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_REPORT_DELETED_MESSAGES

Report deleted messages

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Set this to true to post events for all messages which were deleted from the outbox before being correctly sent and confirmed.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

MQTT Using custom configurations

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Custom MQTT configurations.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_TCP_DEFAULT_PORT

Default MQTT over TCP port

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

Default MQTT over TCP port

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_SSL_DEFAULT_PORT

Default MQTT over SSL port

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

Default MQTT over SSL port

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_WS_DEFAULT_PORT

Default MQTT over Websocket port

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

Default MQTT over Websocket port

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_WSS_DEFAULT_PORT

Default MQTT over Websocket Secure port

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

Default MQTT over Websocket Secure port

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_BUFFER_SIZE

Default MQTT Buffer Size

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

This buffer size using for both transmit and receive

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_TASK_STACK_SIZE

MQTT task stack size

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

MQTT task stack size

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_DISABLE_API_LOCKS

Disable API locks

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

Default config employs API locks to protect internal structures. It is possible to disable these locks if the user code doesn’t access MQTT API from multiple concurrent tasks

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_TASK_PRIORITY

MQTT task priority

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

MQTT task priority. Higher number denotes higher priority.

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_TASK_CORE_SELECTION_ENABLED

Enable MQTT task core selection

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

This will enable core selection

CONFIG_MQTT_TASK_CORE_SELECTION

Core to use ?

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_TASK_CORE_SELECTION_ENABLED

Available options:

  • Core 0 (MQTT_USE_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (MQTT_USE_CORE_1)

CONFIG_MQTT_CUSTOM_OUTBOX

Enable custom outbox implementation

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Set to true if a specific implementation of message outbox is needed (e.g. persistent outbox in NVM or similar). Note: Implementation of the custom outbox must be added to the mqtt component. These CMake commands could be used to append the custom implementation to lib-mqtt sources: idf_component_get_property(mqtt mqtt COMPONENT_LIB) set_property(TARGET ${mqtt} PROPERTY SOURCES ${PROJECT_DIR}/custom_outbox.c APPEND)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_OUTBOX_EXPIRED_TIMEOUT_MS

Outbox message expired timeout[ms]

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Messages which stays in the outbox longer than this value before being published will be discarded.

Default value:

Newlib

Contains:

CONFIG_NEWLIB_STDOUT_LINE_ENDING

Line ending for UART output

Found in: Component config > Newlib

This option allows configuring the desired line endings sent to UART when a newline (’n’, LF) appears on stdout. Three options are possible:

CRLF: whenever LF is encountered, prepend it with CR

LF: no modification is applied, stdout is sent as is

CR: each occurence of LF is replaced with CR

This option doesn’t affect behavior of the UART driver (drivers/uart.h).

Available options:

  • CRLF (NEWLIB_STDOUT_LINE_ENDING_CRLF)

  • LF (NEWLIB_STDOUT_LINE_ENDING_LF)

  • CR (NEWLIB_STDOUT_LINE_ENDING_CR)

CONFIG_NEWLIB_STDIN_LINE_ENDING

Line ending for UART input

Found in: Component config > Newlib

This option allows configuring which input sequence on UART produces a newline (’n’, LF) on stdin. Three options are possible:

CRLF: CRLF is converted to LF

LF: no modification is applied, input is sent to stdin as is

CR: each occurence of CR is replaced with LF

This option doesn’t affect behavior of the UART driver (drivers/uart.h).

Available options:

  • CRLF (NEWLIB_STDIN_LINE_ENDING_CRLF)

  • LF (NEWLIB_STDIN_LINE_ENDING_LF)

  • CR (NEWLIB_STDIN_LINE_ENDING_CR)

CONFIG_NEWLIB_NANO_FORMAT

Enable ‘nano’ formatting options for printf/scanf family

Found in: Component config > Newlib

ESP32 ROM contains parts of newlib C library, including printf/scanf family of functions. These functions have been compiled with so-called “nano” formatting option. This option doesn’t support 64-bit integer formats and C99 features, such as positional arguments.

For more details about “nano” formatting option, please see newlib readme file, search for ‘–enable-newlib-nano-formatted-io’: https://sourceware.org/newlib/README

If this option is enabled, build system will use functions available in ROM, reducing the application binary size. Functions available in ROM run faster than functions which run from flash. Functions available in ROM can also run when flash instruction cache is disabled.

If you need 64-bit integer formatting support or C99 features, keep this option disabled.

CONFIG_NEWLIB_TIME_SYSCALL

Timers used for gettimeofday function

Found in: Component config > Newlib

This setting defines which hardware timers are used to implement ‘gettimeofday’ and ‘time’ functions in C library.

  • If both high-resolution (systimer for all targets except ESP32)

    and RTC timers are used, timekeeping will continue in deep sleep. Time will be reported at 1 microsecond resolution. This is the default, and the recommended option.

  • If only high-resolution timer (systimer) is used, gettimeofday will

    provide time at microsecond resolution. Time will not be preserved when going into deep sleep mode.

  • If only RTC timer is used, timekeeping will continue in

    deep sleep, but time will be measured at 6.(6) microsecond resolution. Also the gettimeofday function itself may take longer to run.

  • If no timers are used, gettimeofday and time functions

    return -1 and set errno to ENOSYS.

  • When RTC is used for timekeeping, two RTC_STORE registers are

    used to keep time in deep sleep mode.

Available options:

  • RTC and high-resolution timer (NEWLIB_TIME_SYSCALL_USE_RTC_HRT)

  • RTC (NEWLIB_TIME_SYSCALL_USE_RTC)

  • High-resolution timer (NEWLIB_TIME_SYSCALL_USE_HRT)

  • None (NEWLIB_TIME_SYSCALL_USE_NONE)

NVS

Contains:

CONFIG_NVS_ENCRYPTION

Enable NVS encryption

Found in: Component config > NVS

This option enables encryption for NVS. When enabled, AES-XTS is used to encrypt the complete NVS data, except the page headers. It requires XTS encryption keys to be stored in an encrypted partition. This means enabling flash encryption is a pre-requisite for this feature.

Default value:
CONFIG_NVS_COMPATIBLE_PRE_V4_3_ENCRYPTION_FLAG

NVS partition encrypted flag compatible with ESP-IDF before v4.3

Found in: Component config > NVS

Enabling this will ignore “encrypted” flag for NVS partitions. NVS encryption scheme is different than hardware flash encryption and hence it is not recommended to have “encrypted” flag for NVS partitions. This was not being checked in pre v4.3 IDF. Hence, if you have any devices where this flag is kept enabled in partition table then enabling this config will allow to have same behavior as pre v4.3 IDF.

CONFIG_NVS_ASSERT_ERROR_CHECK

Use assertions for error checking

Found in: Component config > NVS

This option switches error checking type between assertions (y) or return codes (n).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

OpenThread

Contains:

CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

OpenThread

Found in: Component config > OpenThread

Select this option to enable OpenThread and show the submenu with OpenThread configuration choices.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_LOG_LEVEL_DYNAMIC

Enable dynamic log level control

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Select this option to enable dynamic log level control for OpenThread

Default value:
CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_LOG_LEVEL

OpenThread log verbosity

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Select OpenThread log level.

Available options:

  • No logs (OPENTHREAD_LOG_LEVEL_NONE)

  • Error logs (OPENTHREAD_LOG_LEVEL_CRIT)

  • Warning logs (OPENTHREAD_LOG_LEVEL_WARN)

  • Notice logs (OPENTHREAD_LOG_LEVEL_NOTE)

  • Info logs (OPENTHREAD_LOG_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug logs (OPENTHREAD_LOG_LEVEL_DEBG)

CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_RADIO_TYPE

Config the Thread radio type

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Configure how OpenThread connects to the 15.4 radio

Available options:

  • Native 15.4 radio (OPENTHREAD_RADIO_NATIVE)

    Select this to use the native 15.4 radio.

  • Connect via UART (OPENTHREAD_RADIO_SPINEL_UART)

    Select this to connect to a Radio Co-Processor via UART.

CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_DEVICE_TYPE

Config the Thread device type

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

OpenThread can be configured to different device types (FTD, MTD, Radio)

Available options:

  • Full Thread Device (OPENTHREAD_FTD)

    Select this to enable Full Thread Device which can act as router and leader in a Thread network.

  • Minimal Thread Device (OPENTHREAD_MTD)

    Select this to enable Minimal Thread Device which can only act as end device in a Thread network. This will reduce the code size of the OpenThread stack.

  • Radio Only Device (OPENTHREAD_RADIO)

    Select this to enable Radio Only Device which can only forward 15.4 packets to the host. The OpenThread stack will be run on the host and OpenThread will have minimal footprint on the radio only device.

CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_CLI

Enable Openthread Command-Line Interface

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Select this option to enable Command-Line Interface in OpenThread.

Default value:
CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_DIAG

Enable diag

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Select this option to enable Diag in OpenThread. This will enable diag mode and a series of diag commands in the OpenThread command line. These commands allow users to manipulate low-level features of the storage and 15.4 radio.

Default value:
CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_COMMISSIONER

Enable Commissioner

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Select this option to enable commissioner in OpenThread. This will enable the device to act as a commissioner in the Thread network. A commissioner checks the pre-shared key from a joining device with the Thread commissioning protocol and shares the network parameter with the joining device upon success.

Default value:
CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_JOINER

Enable Joiner

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Select this option to enable Joiner in OpenThread. This allows a device to join the Thread network with a pre-shared key using the Thread commissioning protocol.

Default value:
CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_SRP_CLIENT

Enable SRP Client

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Select this option to enable SRP Client in OpenThread. This allows a device to register SRP services to SRP Server.

Default value:
CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_BORDER_ROUTER

Enable Border Router

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Select this option to enable border router features in OpenThread.

Default value:
CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_NUM_MESSAGE_BUFFERS

The number of openthread message buffers

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_DNS64_CLIENT

Use dns64 client

Found in: Component config > OpenThread > CONFIG_OPENTHREAD_ENABLED

Select this option to acquire NAT64 address from dns servers.

Default value:

Protocomm

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_PROTOCOMM_SUPPORT_SECURITY_VERSION_0

Support protocomm security version 0 (no security)

Found in: Component config > Protocomm

Enable support of security version 0. Disabling this option saves some code size. Consult the Enabling protocomm security version section of the Protocomm documentation in ESP-IDF Programming guide for more details.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_PROTOCOMM_SUPPORT_SECURITY_VERSION_1

Support protocomm security version 1 (Curve25519 key exchange + AES-CTR encryption/decryption)

Found in: Component config > Protocomm

Enable support of security version 1. Disabling this option saves some code size. Consult the Enabling protocomm security version section of the Protocomm documentation in ESP-IDF Programming guide for more details.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_PROTOCOMM_SUPPORT_SECURITY_VERSION_2

Support protocomm security version 2 (SRP6a-based key exchange + AES-GCM encryption/decryption)

Found in: Component config > Protocomm

Enable support of security version 2. Disabling this option saves some code size. Consult the Enabling protocomm security version section of the Protocomm documentation in ESP-IDF Programming guide for more details.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

PThreads

Contains:

CONFIG_PTHREAD_TASK_PRIO_DEFAULT

Default task priority

Found in: Component config > PThreads

Priority used to create new tasks with default pthread parameters.

Range:

  • from 0 to 255

Default value:

  • 5

CONFIG_PTHREAD_TASK_STACK_SIZE_DEFAULT

Default task stack size

Found in: Component config > PThreads

Stack size used to create new tasks with default pthread parameters.

Default value:

  • 3072

CONFIG_PTHREAD_STACK_MIN

Minimum allowed pthread stack size

Found in: Component config > PThreads

Minimum allowed pthread stack size set in attributes passed to pthread_create

Default value:

  • 768

CONFIG_PTHREAD_TASK_CORE_DEFAULT

Default pthread core affinity

Found in: Component config > PThreads

The default core to which pthreads are pinned.

Available options:

  • No affinity (PTHREAD_DEFAULT_CORE_NO_AFFINITY)

  • Core 0 (PTHREAD_DEFAULT_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (PTHREAD_DEFAULT_CORE_1)

CONFIG_PTHREAD_TASK_NAME_DEFAULT

Default name of pthreads

Found in: Component config > PThreads

The default name of pthreads.

Default value:

  • “pthread”

SoC Settings

Contains:

MMU Config

Main Flash configuration

Contains:

SPI Flash behavior when brownout

Contains:

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_BROWNOUT_RESET_XMC

Enable sending reset when brownout for XMC flash chips

Found in: Component config > Main Flash configuration > SPI Flash behavior when brownout

When this option is selected, the patch will be enabled for XMC. Follow the recommended flow by XMC for better stability.

DO NOT DISABLE UNLESS YOU KNOW WHAT YOU ARE DOING.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if APP_BUILD_TYPE_PURE_RAM_APP

Optional and Experimental Features (READ DOCS FIRST)

Contains:

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_HPM_DC

Support HPM using DC (READ DOCS FIRST)

Found in: Component config > Main Flash configuration > Optional and Experimental Features (READ DOCS FIRST)

This feature needs your bootloader to be compiled DC-aware (BOOTLOADER_FLASH_DC_AWARE=y). Otherwise the chip will not be able to boot after a reset.

Available options:

  • Auto (Enable when bootloader support enabled (BOOTLOADER_FLASH_DC_AWARE)) (SPI_FLASH_HPM_DC_AUTO)

  • Disable (READ DOCS FIRST) (SPI_FLASH_HPM_DC_DISABLE)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_FORCE_ENABLE_XMC_C_SUSPEND

Enable XMC-C series flash chip suspend feature anyway

Found in: Component config > Main Flash configuration > Optional and Experimental Features (READ DOCS FIRST)

XMC-C series is regarded as not qualified for the Suspend feature, since its specification has a tRS >= 1ms restriction. We strongly do not suggest using it for the Suspend feature. However, if your product in field has enabled this feature, you may still enable this config option to keep the legacy behavior.

For new users, DO NOT enable this config.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if APP_BUILD_TYPE_PURE_RAM_APP

SPI Flash driver

Contains:

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_VERIFY_WRITE

Verify SPI flash writes

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

If this option is enabled, any time SPI flash is written then the data will be read back and verified. This can catch hardware problems with SPI flash, or flash which was not erased before verification.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_LOG_FAILED_WRITE

Log errors if verification fails

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_VERIFY_WRITE

If this option is enabled, if SPI flash write verification fails then a log error line will be written with the address, expected & actual values. This can be useful when debugging hardware SPI flash problems.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_WARN_SETTING_ZERO_TO_ONE

Log warning if writing zero bits to ones

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_VERIFY_WRITE

If this option is enabled, any SPI flash write which tries to set zero bits in the flash to ones will log a warning. Such writes will not result in the requested data appearing identically in flash once written, as SPI NOR flash can only set bits to one when an entire sector is erased. After erasing, individual bits can only be written from one to zero.

Note that some software (such as SPIFFS) which is aware of SPI NOR flash may write one bits as an optimisation, relying on the data in flash becoming a bitwise AND of the new data and any existing data. Such software will log spurious warnings if this option is enabled.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_ENABLE_COUNTERS

Enable operation counters

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

This option enables the following APIs:

  • spi_flash_reset_counters

  • spi_flash_dump_counters

  • spi_flash_get_counters

These APIs may be used to collect performance data for spi_flash APIs and to help understand behaviour of libraries which use SPI flash.

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_ROM_DRIVER_PATCH

Enable SPI flash ROM driver patched functions

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

Enable this flag to use patched versions of SPI flash ROM driver functions. This option should be enabled, if any one of the following is true: (1) need to write to flash on ESP32-D2WD; (2) main SPI flash is connected to non-default pins; (3) main SPI flash chip is manufactured by ISSI.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_DANGEROUS_WRITE

Writing to dangerous flash regions

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

SPI flash APIs can optionally abort or return a failure code if erasing or writing addresses that fall at the beginning of flash (covering the bootloader and partition table) or that overlap the app partition that contains the running app.

It is not recommended to ever write to these regions from an IDF app, and this check prevents logic errors or corrupted firmware memory from damaging these regions.

Note that this feature *does not* check calls to the esp_rom_xxx SPI flash ROM functions. These functions should not be called directly from IDF applications.

Available options:

  • Aborts (SPI_FLASH_DANGEROUS_WRITE_ABORTS)

  • Fails (SPI_FLASH_DANGEROUS_WRITE_FAILS)

  • Allowed (SPI_FLASH_DANGEROUS_WRITE_ALLOWED)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SHARE_SPI1_BUS

Support other devices attached to SPI1 bus

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

Each SPI bus needs a lock for arbitration among devices. This allows multiple devices on a same bus, but may reduce the speed of esp_flash driver access to the main flash chip.

If you only need to use esp_flash driver to access the main flash chip, disable this option, and the lock will be bypassed on SPI1 bus. Otherwise if extra devices are needed to attach to SPI1 bus, enable this option.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_BYPASS_BLOCK_ERASE

Bypass a block erase and always do sector erase

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

Some flash chips can have very high “max” erase times, especially for block erase (32KB or 64KB). This option allows to bypass “block erase” and always do sector erase commands. This will be much slower overall in most cases, but improves latency for other code to run.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_YIELD_DURING_ERASE

Enables yield operation during flash erase

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

This allows to yield the CPUs between erase commands. Prevents starvation of other tasks. Please use this configuration together with SPI\_FLASH\_ERASE\_YIELD\_DURATION\_MS and SPI\_FLASH\_ERASE\_YIELD\_TICKS after carefully checking flash datasheet to avoid a watchdog timeout. For more information, please check SPI Flash API reference documentation under section OS Function.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_ERASE_YIELD_DURATION_MS

Duration of erasing to yield CPUs (ms)

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_YIELD_DURING_ERASE

If a duration of one erase command is large then it will yield CPUs after finishing a current command.

Default value:

  • 20

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_ERASE_YIELD_TICKS

CPU release time (tick) for an erase operation

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_YIELD_DURING_ERASE

Defines how many ticks will be before returning to continue a erasing.

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_WRITE_CHUNK_SIZE

Flash write chunk size

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

Flash write is broken down in terms of multiple (smaller) write operations. This configuration options helps to set individual write chunk size, smaller value here ensures that cache (and non-IRAM resident interrupts) remains disabled for shorter duration.

Range:

  • from 256 to 8192

Default value:

  • 8192

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SIZE_OVERRIDE

Override flash size in bootloader header by ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

SPI Flash driver uses the flash size configured in bootloader header by default. Enable this option to override flash size with latest ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE value from the app header if the size in the bootloader header is incorrect.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_CHECK_ERASE_TIMEOUT_DISABLED

Flash timeout checkout disabled

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

This option is helpful if you are using a flash chip whose timeout is quite large or unpredictable.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_OVERRIDE_CHIP_DRIVER_LIST

Override default chip driver list

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

This option allows the chip driver list to be customized, instead of using the default list provided by ESP-IDF.

When this option is enabled, the default list is no longer compiled or linked. Instead, the default_registered_chips structure must be provided by the user.

See example: custom_chip_driver under examples/storage for more details.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Auto-detect flash chips

Contains:

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_ISSI_CHIP

ISSI

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of ISSI chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_MXIC_CHIP

MXIC

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of MXIC chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_GD_CHIP

GigaDevice

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of GD (GigaDevice) chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. If you are using Wrover modules, please don’t disable this, otherwise your flash may not work in 4-bit mode.

This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time and image size. Note that the default chip driver supports the GD chips with product ID 60H.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_WINBOND_CHIP

Winbond

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of Winbond chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_BOYA_CHIP

BOYA

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of BOYA chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_TH_CHIP

TH

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of TH chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_ENABLE_ENCRYPTED_READ_WRITE

Enable encrypted partition read/write operations

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

This option enables flash read/write operations to encrypted partition/s. This option is kept enabled irrespective of state of flash encryption feature. However, in case application is not using flash encryption feature and is in need of some additional memory from IRAM region (~1KB) then this config can be disabled.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

SPIFFS Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIFFS_MAX_PARTITIONS

Maximum Number of Partitions

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Define maximum number of partitions that can be mounted.

Range:

  • from 1 to 10

Default value:

  • 3

SPIFFS Cache Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE

Enable SPIFFS Cache

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > SPIFFS Cache Configuration

Enables/disable memory read caching of nucleus file system operations.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE_WR

Enable SPIFFS Write Caching

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > SPIFFS Cache Configuration > CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE

Enables memory write caching for file descriptors in hydrogen.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE_STATS

Enable SPIFFS Cache Statistics

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > SPIFFS Cache Configuration > CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE

Enable/disable statistics on caching. Debug/test purpose only.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_PAGE_CHECK

Enable SPIFFS Page Check

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Always check header of each accessed page to ensure consistent state. If enabled it will increase number of reads from flash, especially if cache is disabled.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_GC_MAX_RUNS

Set Maximum GC Runs

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Define maximum number of GC runs to perform to reach desired free pages.

Range:

  • from 1 to 10000

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_SPIFFS_GC_STATS

Enable SPIFFS GC Statistics

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Enable/disable statistics on gc. Debug/test purpose only.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_PAGE_SIZE

SPIFFS logical page size

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Logical page size of SPIFFS partition, in bytes. Must be multiple of flash page size (which is usually 256 bytes). Larger page sizes reduce overhead when storing large files, and improve filesystem performance when reading large files. Smaller page sizes reduce overhead when storing small (< page size) files.

Range:

  • from 256 to 1024

Default value:

  • 256

CONFIG_SPIFFS_OBJ_NAME_LEN

Set SPIFFS Maximum Name Length

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Object name maximum length. Note that this length include the zero-termination character, meaning maximum string of characters can at most be SPIFFS_OBJ_NAME_LEN - 1.

SPIFFS_OBJ_NAME_LEN + SPIFFS_META_LENGTH should not exceed SPIFFS_PAGE_SIZE - 64.

Range:

  • from 1 to 256

Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_SPIFFS_USE_MAGIC

Enable SPIFFS Filesystem Magic

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Enable this to have an identifiable spiffs filesystem. This will look for a magic in all sectors to determine if this is a valid spiffs system or not at mount time.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_USE_MAGIC_LENGTH

Enable SPIFFS Filesystem Length Magic

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > CONFIG_SPIFFS_USE_MAGIC

If this option is enabled, the magic will also be dependent on the length of the filesystem. For example, a filesystem configured and formatted for 4 megabytes will not be accepted for mounting with a configuration defining the filesystem as 2 megabytes.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_META_LENGTH

Size of per-file metadata field

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

This option sets the number of extra bytes stored in the file header. These bytes can be used in an application-specific manner. Set this to at least 4 bytes to enable support for saving file modification time.

SPIFFS_OBJ_NAME_LEN + SPIFFS_META_LENGTH should not exceed SPIFFS_PAGE_SIZE - 64.

Default value:

  • 4

CONFIG_SPIFFS_USE_MTIME

Save file modification time

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

If enabled, then the first 4 bytes of per-file metadata will be used to store file modification time (mtime), accessible through stat/fstat functions. Modification time is updated when the file is opened.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_MTIME_WIDE_64_BITS

The time field occupies 64 bits in the image instead of 32 bits

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

If this option is not set, the time field is 32 bits (up to 2106 year), otherwise it is 64 bits and make sure it matches SPIFFS_META_LENGTH. If the chip already has the spiffs image with the time field = 32 bits then this option cannot be applied in this case. Erase it first before using this option. To resolve the Y2K38 problem for the spiffs, use a toolchain with 64-bit time_t support.

Default value:
Debug Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIFFS_DBG

Enable general SPIFFS debug

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enabling this option will print general debug mesages to the console.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_API_DBG

Enable SPIFFS API debug

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enabling this option will print API debug mesages to the console.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_GC_DBG

Enable SPIFFS Garbage Cleaner debug

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enabling this option will print GC debug mesages to the console.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE_DBG

Enable SPIFFS Cache debug

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enabling this option will print cache debug mesages to the console.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_CHECK_DBG

Enable SPIFFS Filesystem Check debug

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enabling this option will print Filesystem Check debug mesages to the console.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_TEST_VISUALISATION

Enable SPIFFS Filesystem Visualization

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enable this option to enable SPIFFS_vis function in the API.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

TCP Transport

Contains:

Websocket

Contains:

CONFIG_WS_TRANSPORT

Enable Websocket Transport

Found in: Component config > TCP Transport > Websocket

Enable support for creating websocket transport.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_WS_BUFFER_SIZE

Websocket transport buffer size

Found in: Component config > TCP Transport > Websocket > CONFIG_WS_TRANSPORT

Size of the buffer used for constructing the HTTP Upgrade request during connect

Default value:

  • 1024

CONFIG_WS_DYNAMIC_BUFFER

Using dynamic websocket transport buffer

Found in: Component config > TCP Transport > Websocket > CONFIG_WS_TRANSPORT

If enable this option, websocket transport buffer will be freed after connection succeed to save more heap.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Ultra Low Power (ULP) Co-processor

Contains:

CONFIG_ULP_COPROC_ENABLED

Enable Ultra Low Power (ULP) Co-processor

Found in: Component config > Ultra Low Power (ULP) Co-processor

Enable this feature if you plan to use the ULP Co-processor. Once this option is enabled, further ULP co-processor configuration will appear in the menu.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ULP_COPROC_TYPE

ULP Co-processor type

Found in: Component config > Ultra Low Power (ULP) Co-processor > CONFIG_ULP_COPROC_ENABLED

Choose the ULP Coprocessor type: ULP FSM (Finite State Machine) or ULP RISC-V. Please note that ESP32 only supports ULP FSM.

Available options:

  • ULP FSM (Finite State Machine) (ULP_COPROC_TYPE_FSM)

  • ULP RISC-V (ULP_COPROC_TYPE_RISCV)

CONFIG_ULP_COPROC_RESERVE_MEM

RTC slow memory reserved for coprocessor

Found in: Component config > Ultra Low Power (ULP) Co-processor > CONFIG_ULP_COPROC_ENABLED

Bytes of memory to reserve for ULP Co-processor firmware & data. Data is reserved at the beginning of RTC slow memory.

Range:
Default value:
ULP RISC-V Settings

Unity unit testing library

Contains:

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_FLOAT

Support for float type

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If not set, assertions on float arguments will not be available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_DOUBLE

Support for double type

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If not set, assertions on double arguments will not be available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_64BIT

Support for 64-bit integer types

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If not set, assertions on 64-bit integer types will always fail. If this feature is enabled, take care not to pass pointers (which are 32 bit) to UNITY_ASSERT_EQUAL, as that will cause pointer-to-int-cast warnings.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_COLOR

Colorize test output

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If set, Unity will colorize test results using console escape sequences.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_IDF_TEST_RUNNER

Include ESP-IDF test registration/running helpers

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If set, then the following features will be available:

  • TEST_CASE macro which performs automatic registration of test functions

  • Functions to run registered test functions: unity_run_all_tests, unity_run_tests_with_filter, unity_run_single_test_by_name.

  • Interactive menu which lists test cases and allows choosing the tests to be run, available via unity_run_menu function.

Disable if a different test registration mechanism is used.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_FIXTURE

Include Unity test fixture

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If set, unity_fixture.h header file and associated source files are part of the build. These provide an optional set of macros and functions to implement test groups.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_BACKTRACE_ON_FAIL

Print a backtrace when a unit test fails

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If set, the unity framework will print the backtrace information before jumping back to the test menu. The jumping is usually occurs in assert functions such as TEST_ASSERT, TEST_FAIL etc.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Virtual file system

Contains:

CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO

Provide basic I/O functions

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system

If enabled, the following functions are provided by the VFS component.

open, close, read, write, pread, pwrite, lseek, fstat, fsync, ioctl, fcntl

Filesystem drivers can then be registered to handle these functions for specific paths.

Disabling this option can save memory when the support for these functions is not required.

Note that the following functions can still be used with socket file descriptors when this option is disabled:

close, read, write, ioctl, fcntl.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_DIR

Provide directory related functions

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO

If enabled, the following functions are provided by the VFS component.

stat, link, unlink, rename, utime, access, truncate, rmdir, mkdir, opendir, closedir, readdir, readdir_r, seekdir, telldir, rewinddir

Filesystem drivers can then be registered to handle these functions for specific paths.

Disabling this option can save memory when the support for these functions is not required.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_SELECT

Provide select function

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO

If enabled, select function is provided by the VFS component, and can be used on peripheral file descriptors (such as UART) and sockets at the same time.

If disabled, the default select implementation will be provided by LWIP for sockets only.

Disabling this option can reduce code size if support for “select” on UART file descriptors is not required.

Default value:
CONFIG_VFS_SUPPRESS_SELECT_DEBUG_OUTPUT

Suppress select() related debug outputs

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_SELECT

Select() related functions might produce an unconveniently lot of debug outputs when one sets the default log level to DEBUG or higher. It is possible to suppress these debug outputs by enabling this option.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_TERMIOS

Provide termios.h functions

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO

Disabling this option can save memory when the support for termios.h is not required.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Host File System I/O (Semihosting)

Contains:

CONFIG_VFS_SEMIHOSTFS_MAX_MOUNT_POINTS

Host FS: Maximum number of the host filesystem mount points

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO > Host File System I/O (Semihosting)

Define maximum number of host filesystem mount points.

Default value:

  • 1

Wear Levelling

Contains:

CONFIG_WL_SECTOR_SIZE

Wear Levelling library sector size

Found in: Component config > Wear Levelling

Sector size used by wear levelling library. You can set default sector size or size that will fit to the flash device sector size.

With sector size set to 4096 bytes, wear levelling library is more efficient. However if FAT filesystem is used on top of wear levelling library, it will need more temporary storage: 4096 bytes for each mounted filesystem and 4096 bytes for each opened file.

With sector size set to 512 bytes, wear levelling library will perform more operations with flash memory, but less RAM will be used by FAT filesystem library (512 bytes for the filesystem and 512 bytes for each file opened).

Available options:

  • 512 (WL_SECTOR_SIZE_512)

  • 4096 (WL_SECTOR_SIZE_4096)

CONFIG_WL_SECTOR_MODE

Sector store mode

Found in: Component config > Wear Levelling

Specify the mode to store data into flash:

  • In Performance mode a data will be stored to the RAM and then stored back to the flash. Compared to the Safety mode, this operation is faster, but if power will be lost when erase sector operation is in progress, then the data from complete flash device sector will be lost.

  • In Safety mode data from complete flash device sector will be read from flash, modified, and then stored back to flash. Compared to the Performance mode, this operation is slower, but if power is lost during erase sector operation, then the data from full flash device sector will not be lost.

Available options:

  • Perfomance (WL_SECTOR_MODE_PERF)

  • Safety (WL_SECTOR_MODE_SAFE)

Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

Contains:

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_SCAN_MAX_ENTRIES

Max Wi-Fi Scan Result Entries

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

This sets the maximum number of entries of Wi-Fi scan results that will be kept by the provisioning manager

Range:

  • from 1 to 255

Default value:

  • 16

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_AUTOSTOP_TIMEOUT

Provisioning auto-stop timeout

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

Time (in seconds) after which the Wi-Fi provisioning manager will auto-stop after connecting to a Wi-Fi network successfully.

Range:

  • from 5 to 600

Default value:

  • 30

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_BLE_BONDING

Enable BLE bonding

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

This option is applicable only when provisioning transport is BLE.

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_BLE_SEC_CONN

Enable BLE Secure connection flag

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

Used to enable Secure connection support when provisioning transport is BLE.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_BLE_FORCE_ENCRYPTION

Force Link Encryption during characteristic Read / Write

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

Used to enforce link encryption when attempting to read / write characteristic

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_KEEP_BLE_ON_AFTER_PROV

Keep BT on after provisioning is done

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_DISCONNECT_AFTER_PROV

Terminate connection after provisioning is done

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager > CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_KEEP_BLE_ON_AFTER_PROV

Default value:
CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_STA_SCAN_METHOD

Wifi Provisioning Scan Method

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

Available options:

  • All Channel Scan (WIFI_PROV_STA_ALL_CHANNEL_SCAN)

    Scan will end after scanning the entire channel. This option is useful in Mesh WiFi Systems.

  • Fast Scan (WIFI_PROV_STA_FAST_SCAN)

    Scan will end after an AP matching with the SSID has been detected.

Supplicant

Contains:

CONFIG_WPA_MBEDTLS_CRYPTO

Use MbedTLS crypto APIs

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable the use of MbedTLS crypto APIs. The internal crypto support within the supplicant is limited and may not suffice for all new security features, including WPA3.

It is recommended to always keep this option enabled. Additionally, note that MbedTLS can leverage hardware acceleration if available, resulting in significantly faster cryptographic operations.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_WPA_MBEDTLS_TLS_CLIENT

Use MbedTLS TLS client for WiFi Enterprise connection

Found in: Component config > Supplicant > CONFIG_WPA_MBEDTLS_CRYPTO

Select this option to use MbedTLS TLS client for WPA2 enterprise connection. Please note that from MbedTLS-3.0 onwards, MbedTLS does not support SSL-3.0 TLS-v1.0, TLS-v1.1 versions. Incase your server is using one of these version, it is advisable to update your server. Please disable this option for compatibilty with older TLS versions.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_WPA_WAPI_PSK

Enable WAPI PSK support

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable WAPI-PSK which is a Chinese National Standard Encryption for Wireless LANs (GB 15629.11-2003).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_SUITE_B_192

Enable NSA suite B support with 192 bit key

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable 192 bit NSA suite-B. This is necessary to support WPA3 192 bit security.

CONFIG_WPA_DEBUG_PRINT

Print debug messages from WPA Supplicant

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to print logging information from WPA supplicant, this includes handshake information and key hex dumps depending on the project logging level.

Enabling this could increase the build size ~60kb depending on the project logging level.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_TESTING_OPTIONS

Add DPP testing code

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this to enable unity test for DPP.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_WPS_STRICT

Strictly validate all WPS attributes

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable validate each WPS attribute rigorously. Disabling this add the workaorunds with various APs. Enabling this may cause inter operability issues with some APs.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_11KV_SUPPORT

Enable 802.11k, 802.11v APIs Support

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable 802.11k 802.11v APIs(RRM and BTM support). Only APIs which are helpful for network assisted roaming are supported for now. Enable this option with BTM and RRM enabled in sta config to make device ready for network assisted roaming. BTM: BSS transition management enables an AP to request a station to transition to a specific AP, or to indicate to a station a set of preferred APs. RRM: Radio measurements enable STAs to understand the radio environment, it enables STAs to observe and gather data on radio link performance and on the radio environment. Current implementation adds beacon report, link measurement, neighbor report.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_SCAN_CACHE

Keep scan results in cache

Found in: Component config > Supplicant > CONFIG_WPA_11KV_SUPPORT

Keep scan results in cache, if not enabled, those will be flushed immediately.

Default value:
CONFIG_WPA_MBO_SUPPORT

Enable Multi Band Operation Certification Support

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable WiFi Multiband operation certification support.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_DPP_SUPPORT

Enable DPP support

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable WiFi Easy Connect Support.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_11R_SUPPORT

Enable 802.11R (Fast Transition) Support

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable WiFi Fast Transition Support.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_WPS_SOFTAP_REGISTRAR

Add WPS Registrar support in SoftAP mode

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable WPS registrar support in softAP mode.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Deprecated options and their replacements

提供有关此文档的反馈